Advertisement
Advertisement
User Manual
Original Instructions
E200 Electronic Overload Relay/Parameter Configuration
Module
Bulletin Numbers 193, 592
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Overview
Diagnostic Station
Table of Contents
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Preface
Chapter 1
Module Descriptions and Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Single-/Three-Phase Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Thermal Overload Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Current Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ground (Earth) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Control Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Sensing Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Communication Module Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Power Supply Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Expansion Operator Station Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
External Current Transformer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Single/Three-Phase Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Optional Add-On Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Optional Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Optional Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Optional Expansion Bus Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Standard Current-based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ground Fault Current-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Voltage- and Power-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Thermal-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 2
Parameter Group Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
3
Table of Contents
4
System Operation and
Configuration
Operating Modes
Linear List Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Editing a Configuration Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Editing a Numeric Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Programmable Display Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Stopping the Display Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Automatic Trip and Warning Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 3
Digital I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Option Match Action (Parameter 233). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Output Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Output Relay Configuration States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Analog Output Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Introduction to Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 4
Overload Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Overload (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Overload (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Overload (Local I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Overload (Custom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Non-reversing Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Non-reversing Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Table of Contents
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback . . . . . 58
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . 59
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . 62
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . 65
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Non-reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Reversing Starter Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Reversing Starter (Network). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . 79
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . 85
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Two-speed Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Two-speed Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback. . . . . . . . . 96
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . 99
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . . . 102
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . 103
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
5
Table of Contents
6
Protective Trip and Warning
Functions
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Monitor Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Monitor (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Chapter 5
Current Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Phase Loss Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Ground Fault Current Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Underload Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Current Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Line Undercurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Line Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Line Loss Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Undervoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Voltage Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Phase Rotation Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Frequency Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Real Power (kW) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Power Factor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Control Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Thermistor (PTC) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
DeviceLogix Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Operator Station Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Start Inhibit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Contactor Feedback Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Nonvolatile Storage Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Commands
Metering and Diagnostics
DeviceLogix Functionality
Connected Components
Workbench Software
Configuration
Firmware and EDS Files
Table of Contents
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Trip History Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Trip History Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Warning History Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 8
DeviceLogix Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Chapter 9
Connected Components Workbench Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Connected Components Workbench Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Commissioning the Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Chapter 10
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) File Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Download the EDS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
7
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting
Wiring Diagrams
Chapter 11
Trip/Warn LED Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Appendix A
E200 Wiring Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Index
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Access Relay Parameters
Preface
This manual describes how to install, configure, operate, and troubleshoot the
E200™ Electronic Overload Relay.
The Microsoft Excel spreadsheet that is attached to this PDF file details the
E200 parameters. To use a spreadsheet file, click the Attachments link and right-click and save the desired file.
If the PDF file opens in a browser and you don't see the Attachments link , download the PDF file and then reopen the file with the Adobe Acrobat
Reader application. For full functionality (filter and search), use the Microsoft
Excel application.
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource
E200 Electronic Overload Relay Installation Instructions, publication 193-IN080
E300/E200 Electronic Overload Relay Specifications, publication 193-TD006
E300/E200 Operator Station, Installation Instructions, publication 193-IN061
Connected Components Workbench Software Quick Tips, publication 9328-SP002
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1
Product Certifications website, https://rok.auto/certifications
Description
Provides complete user information for the E200 Electronic Overload Relay.
Provides complete specifications for the E200 Electronic Overload Relay.
Provides complete user information for the E300/E200 Operator Station.
Provides general overview of the Connected Components Workbench Software.
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
You can view or download publications at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
.
To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
9
Preface
Notes:
10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
1
Overview
The E200™ Electronic Overload Relay is the newest part of the E300™ product portfolio. This device is a Parameter Configuration module communication option that is targeted for non-networked (remote) electronic motor overload protection applications. The E200 overload relay is configurable using the Connected
Components Workbench™ software. The E200 relay features a single Type B USB interface port, three rotary dials to set the full-load current (FLA) for the application, and an 8-position DIP switch to select trip class and features.
Like the other products in the portfolio, the E200 relay modular design, diagnostic information, simplified wiring, and integration with Connected Components
Workbench software make it the ideal overload for motor control applications in an automation system.
E200 Electronic Overload Relays provide the following benefits:
• Intelligent motor control
• Scalable solution
• Diagnostic Information
• Integrated I/O
• Adjustable trip class 5…30
• Wide current range
• Test/Reset button
• Programmable trip and warning settings
• True RMS current/voltage sensing (50/60 Hz)
• Protection for single- and three-phase motors
The E200 relay consists of three modules: sensing, control and communications. You have choices in each of the three with additional accessories to tailor the electronic overload for your application’s exact needs.
The E200 overload relay is an overload system configured with the 193-ECM-PCM
Parameter Configuration Module communication option. The communication module determines whether the complete assembled device is an E300 or an E200 overload relay.
Module Descriptions and
Features
Single-/Three-Phase Operation
You can apply the E200 Electronic Overload Relay to three-phase and single-phase applications. Straight-through wiring is available in both cases.
The E200 overload relay has 54 operating modes that provide motor control functionality for the following motor starter types:
• Overload
• Non-reversing starter
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
11
Chapter 1
Overview
Feature
Thermal Utilization
Adjustable Settings
Thermal Memory
Reset Modes
Time to Trip
Time to Reset
Thermal Warning
Two-Speed Protection
• Reversing starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) starter
• Two-speed starter
• Monitoring device
Thermal Overload Features
Description
Based RMS current measurement, the overload relay calculates a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor. Percent of thermal capacity utilization (%TCU) reports this calculated value. An overload trip occurs when the value reaches 100%.
Configure thermal overload protection by programming the motor’s full load current (FLC) rating and the desired trip class (5…30). Programming the actual values via software ensures the accuracy of the protection.
A thermal memory circuit approximates the thermal decay for a Trip Class 20 setting. This means that the thermal model of the connected motor is maintained at all times, even if the supply power is removed.
You can select between manual and automatic reset for an overload trip. The point of reset is adjustable from 1…100% TCU.
During an overload condition, an estimated time to trip is calculated.
Following an overload trip, a reset does not occur until the calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization falls below the reset level. As this value decays, the time to reset adjusts accordingly.
A thermal warning bit is set when the calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization exceeds the programmed thermal warning level, which has a setting range of 0…100% TCU.
There is a second FLA setting for 2-speed motor protection. What used to require two separate overload relays - one for each set of motor windings - is now accomplished with one device.
Feature
Jam (Overcurrent)
Underload (Undercurrent)
Current Imbalance (Asymmetry)
Stall
Phase Loss
Current Monitoring Functions
The E200 Electronic Overload Relay lets you monitor the following operational data over a communications network:
• Individual phase currents — in amperes
• Individual phase currents — as a percentage of motor FLA
• Average current — in amperes
• Average current — as a percentage of motor FLA
• Percentage of thermal capacity utilized
• Current imbalance percentage
• Ground fault current
Description
The overload relay can take a motor off-line in the event of a mechanical jam. Trip adjustments include a trip setting adjustable from 50…600% FLA and a trip delay time with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds. A separate warning setting is adjustable from 50…600% FLA.
A sudden drop in motor current can signal conditions such as:
• Pump cavitation
• Tool breakage
• Belt breakage
Monitoring for an underload event can provide enhanced protection for motors. The underload trip and warning settings are adjustable from 10…100% FLA. The trip function also includes a trip delay time with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Current imbalance trip and warning settings are adjustable from 10…100%. The trip function also includes a trip delay time with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Stall is a condition where the motor is not able to reach full-speed operation in the appropriate amount of time required by the application. This can result in motor overheating, as current draw is in excess of the motor’s full load current rating. The adjustable stall protection has a trip setting with a range of
100…600% FLA, and the enable time is adjustable up to 250 seconds.
Configurable phase loss protection lets you enable or disable the function plus set a time delay setting, adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds. The trip level is factory set at a current imbalance measurement of 100%.
12
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Overview
Chapter 1
Ground (Earth) Fault
The E200 Electronic Overload Relay incorporates zero sequence (core balance) sensing into its design for low level (arcing) ground fault detection. Trip and warning settings are adjustable from 20 mA…5.0 A. For devices rated greater than 200 A and for ground fault detection less than 0.5 A, the external core balance current transformer accessory is required. This particular detection has been evaluated for compliance with Ground-Fault Sensing calibration and operating times from the
Standard for Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment per UL 1053.. The E200
Electronic Overload Relay provides a max. trip-inhibit setting, offering flexibility to help prevent tripping when the ground fault current magnitude exceeds 6.5 A. This can be useful to guard against the opening of the controller when the fault current could potentially exceed the controller's interrupting capacity rating.
Note: The E200 Electronic Overload Relay is not a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter for personnel protection (or Class I) as defined in article 100 of the U.S. National
Electric Code.
IMPORTANT
For applications that require ground fault detection and use the passthrough sensing module, this feature is only active when native motor current is present in the pass-through apertures; that is, no external stepdown current transformers (CTs). You must use an external ground fault sensor for any applications that require external step-down CTs.
Control Module Features
The control module inputs support the connection of devices such as contactors, disconnect auxiliary contacts, pilot devices, limit switches, and float switches. Inputs are rated 24V DC, 120V AC, or 240V AC and are current sinking. Power for the inputs is sourced separately with customer sources. Relay contact outputs can be controlled via the network or DeviceLogix™ function blocks for performing such tasks as contactor operation.
The DeviceLogix engine lets you program custom motor control algorithms. You can write programs for distributed control applications or to turn off a motor smoothly when the network or programmable logic controller is unexpectedly lost.
Control Voltage
110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz
220…240V AC, 50/60 Hz
24V DC
Inputs
4
2
4
2
6
2
(1) Includes PTC thermistor and external ground fault.
I/O
Relay Outputs
3
2
3
2
3
2
I/O and Protection
(1)
Inputs Relay Outputs
2
2
4
2
2
2
The control module also monitors positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
13
Chapter 1
Overview
Feature
Voltage Protection
Power Protection
Voltage, Power, and Energy Monitoring
Sensing Module Features
The E200 sensing module with voltage, current, and ground fault current provides the following:
Description
Protect against voltage issues (such as undervoltage, voltage imbalance, phase loss, frequency, and phase rotation).
Monitor and protect for both excessive and low real power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor for a specific application (such as pump applications).
Monitor voltage, current, power (kW, kVAR, and kVA), energy (kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW Demand, kVAR Demand, and kVA Demand), and power quality
(power factor, frequency, and phase rotation) down at the motor level.
The sensing module supports:
• Voltage/current/ground fault
• Current/ground fault
• Current
• Current Range [A]
• 0.5…30
• 6…60
• 10…100
• 20…200
Communication Module Features
The following communication module is available:
Communication Module
Parameter Configuration Module (E200)
Description
The Parameter Configuration Module (PCM) has one Type B USB interface port and supports the following:
• Stand-alone non-networked applications
• Configurable with Connected Components Workbench software
• Three rotary dials to set Full Load Amps (FLA)
• 8-position DIP switch for trip class and feature selection
Expansion Digital I/O
You can add up to four additional expansion digital modules to the E200 relay expansion bus.
• 4 inputs/2 relay outputs
• 24V DC
• 120V AC
• 240V AC
The remote trip function lets an external device (such as a vibration sensor) induce am trip. External device relay contacts are wired to the discrete inputs. These discrete inputs are configurable with an option for assigning the remote trip function.
Expansion Analog I/O
The E200 analog expansion module lets you protect against over-analog readings from analog-based sensors, such as overtemperature, overflow, or overpressure. The analog expansion module monitors resistance temperature detectors.
14
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Overview
Chapter 1
You can add up to four additional expansion analog modules to the E200 relay expansion bus.
• 3 universal analog inputs/1 analog output
• 0…10V
• 0…5V
• 1…5V
• 0…20 mA
• 4…20 mA
• RTD (2-wire or 3-wire)
• 0…150
• 0…750
• 0…3000
• 0…6000
(PTC/NTC)
Expansion Power Supply Features
When more than one expansion digital module and one operator station are added to the E200 relay expansion bus, you need an expansion power supply to supplement power for the additional modules. One expansion power supply powers a fully loaded
E200 relay expansion bus.
• 120/240V AC
• 24V DC
Expansion Operator Station Features
You can add one operator station to the E200 relay expansion bus to be used as a user interface device. The operator stations provide status indicators and function keys for motor control. The operator stations also support CopyCat™, which lets you upload and download configuration parameters. Using a Series B Control Module and Series B
Control/Diagnostic station offers added functionality for the CopyCat feature by also allowing upload and download of any custom DeviceLogix programming. See publication 193-IN061D for more information about using the CopyCat feature.
• Control station
• Diagnostic station
External Current Transformer Options
For motor overload protection applications greater than 200 A, external current transformers (CTs) can be used to step down the main operating current. This also provides isolation for high current conductors and the E200 Overload Relay. There are different current ranges to select from and also different certification standards (for example, UL or CE) to which the respective CT kits conform.
• UL compliant CT types: 300 A and 600 A
• CE compliant CT types: 300 A and 400 A
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
15
Chapter 1
Overview
Status Indicators
The E200 Electronic Overload Relay provides the following LED indicators:
• Power — This green/red LED indicates the status of the overload relay.
• TRIP/WARN — This LED flashes a yellow code under a warning condition and a red code when tripped.
Inputs/Outputs
Inputs allow the connection of such devices as contactor and disconnect auxiliary contacts, pilot devices, limit switches, and float switches. Input status can be monitored via the network and mapped to a controller’s input image table. Inputs are rated 24V DC, 120V AC, or 240V AC and are current sinking. Power for the inputs is sourced separately with convenient customer sources at terminal A1. Relay contact outputs can be controlled via the network or DeviceLogix function blocks for performing such tasks as contactor operation.
Test/Reset Button
The Test/Reset button, which is located on the front of the E200 Electronic Overload
Relay, lets you perform the following:
• Test — The trip relay contact opens if the E200 Electronic Overload Relay is in an untripped condition and the Test/Reset button is pressed for 2 seconds or longer.
• Reset — The trip relay contact closes if the E200 Electronic Overload Relay is in a tripped condition, supply voltage is present, and the Test/Reset button is pressed.
Single/Three-Phase Operation
You can apply the E200 Electronic Overload Relay to three-phase and single-phase applications. A programming parameter is provided for selection between single- and three-phase operation. Straight-through wiring is available in both cases.
Modular Design
You can select the specific options that you need for your motor starter application.
The E200 relay consists of three modules: sensing, control, and communication. You can customize each of the three with accessories to tailor the electronic motor overload for your application’s exact needs.
• Wide current range
• Sensing capabilities (Current, Ground Fault Current, and/or Voltage)
• Expansion I/O
• Operator interfaces
Communication Options
16
The E200 relay communicates via a USB connection to Connected Components
Workbench software.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Diagnostic Information
Simplified Wiring
Sensing Module
Overview
Chapter 1
The E200 relay provides a wide variety of diagnostic information to monitor motor performance, proactively alert you to possible motor issues, or identify the reason for an unplanned shutdown. Information includes:
• Voltage, Current, and Energy
• Trip / Warning Histories
• % Thermal Capacity Utilization
• Time to Trip
• Time to Reset
• Operational Hours
• Number of Starts
• Trip Snapshot
The E200 relay provides an easy means to mount to both IEC and NEMA
Allen-Bradley® contactors. A contactor coil adapter is available for the 100-C contactor, which lets you create a functional motor starter with only two control wires.
Figure 1 - Sensing Module
The sensing module electronically samples data about the current, voltage, power, and energy that are consumed by the electric motor internal to the module. You can choose from one of three varieties of the sensing modules depending on the motor diagnostic information that is needed for the motor protection application:
• Current Sensing
• Current and Ground Fault Current Sensing
• Current, Ground Fault Current, Voltage, and Power Sensing
The current ranges for each of three varieties of sensing module are as follows:
• 0.5…30 A
• 6…60 A
• 10…100 A
• 20…200 A
You can choose how the sensing module mechanically mounts inside the electrical enclosure. The following mounting mechanisms are available for the sensing module.
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 IEC Contactor
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 NEMA Contactor
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
17
Chapter 1
Overview
Control Module
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500 NEMA Contactor
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals
• Replacement DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals for an
Allen-Bradley E3 Plus panel mount adapter
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with pass-thru power conductors
Use the E200 relay sensing module with external current transformers. The following application guidelines should be adhered to when using an external CT configuration:
• You must mount the E200 Overload Relay a distance equal to or greater than six times the cable diameter (including insulation) from the nearest currentcarrying conductor.
• For applications that use multiple conductors per phase, the diameter of each cable should be added and multiplied by six to determine the proper placement distance for the E200 Overload Relay.
Figure 2 - Control Module
Communication Module
The control module is the base of the E200 relay and can attach to any sensing module.
The control module performs all protection and motor control algorithms and contains the native I/O for the system. The control module has two varieties:
• I/O only
• I/O and protection (PTC and External Ground Fault Current Sensing)
The control module is offered in three control voltages:
• 110…120V AC, 50/60Hz
• 220…240V AC, 50/60Hz
• 24V DC
The E200 relay requires external control voltage to power and activate the digital inputs.
The parameter configuration module lets the E200 relay integrate into an automation system, and it can attach to any control module. Set the full-load current with rotary turn dials; the module uses diagnostic status indicators to provide system status at the panel.
18
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Overview
Chapter 1
Figure 3 - Parameter Configuration Module
Power LED
Trip/Warn LED
Test/Reset
USB communication port
(XX.X / XXX
A
)
FLA adjustment dials
Parameter-setting switches
Optional Add-On Modules
Optional Expansion I/O
If the native I/O count of the base relay is not sufficient for your application, you can add more digital and analog I/O to the system via the E200 relay Expansion Bus. You can add any combination of up to four Digital I/O Expansion Modules that each have four inputs (120V AC, 240V AC, or 24V DC) and two relay outputs.
You can also add up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules, which have three independent universal analog inputs and one isolated analog output per module. The
Analog I/O Expansion Modules require Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher.
The independent universal analog inputs accept the following signals:
• 4…20 mA
• 0…20 mA
• 0…10V DC
• 1…5V DC
• 0…5V DC
• RTD Sensors (Pt 385, Pt 3916, Cu 426, Ni 618, Ni 672, and NiFe 518)
• Resistance (150
, 750
, 3000
, and 6000
)
Program the isolated analog output to reference a traditional analog signal (4…20 mA,
0…20 mA, 0…10V DC, 1…5V, or 0…10V) to represent the following diagnostic values:
• Average %FLA
• %TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
• Average L-L Voltage
• Voltage Imbalance
• Total kW
• Total kVAR
• Total kVA
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
19
Chapter 1
Overview
Optional Operator Station
Figure 4 - Operator Stations
Control Station Diagnostic Station
Power LED
Trip/Warn LED
Power LED
Trip/Warn LED
Escape
Up
Select
Start Forward/Speed 1
Start Reverse/Speed 2
Local/Remote
LOCA
L
TE
Stop
Reset
0
RESET
ESC
SELEC
T
Start Forward/Speed 1
Start Reverse/Speed 2
Local/Remote
Stop
REMO L
TE
Reset
0
RESET
Enter
Down
The E200 relay lets you add one operator interface to the Expansion Bus. There are two types of operator stations: Control Station or a Diagnostic Station. Both types of operator stations mount into a standard 22 mm push button knockout, and they provide diagnostic status indicators that let you view the status of the E200 relay from the outside of an electrical enclosure. Both operator stations provide push buttons that can be used for motor control logic, and they both can be used to upload and download parameter configuration data from the base relay.
The Diagnostic Station contains a display and navigation buttons that lets you view and edit parameters in the base relay. The Diagnostic Station requires Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher.
Optional Expansion Bus
Power Supply
The E200 relay expansion bus provides enough current to operate a system that has (1)
Digital Expansion Module and (1) Operator Station. An E200 relay system that contains more expansion modules needs supplemental current for the Expansion Bus. the E200 relay offers you two types of Expansion Bus Power Supplies:
AC (110…240V AC, 50/60 Hz) and DC (24V DC). One Expansion Bus Power
Supply supplies enough current for a fully loaded E200 relay Expansion Bus (four
Digital Expansion Modules, four Analog Expansion Modules, and one Operator
Station). Both Expansion Bus Power Supplies work with any combination of Digital and Analog Expansion Modules.
Figure 5 - Expansion Bus Power Supply
20
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protection Features
Overview
Chapter 1
The numbers in parentheses in this section represent specific device functions as they relate to the respective protection measures provided. These protection functions correlate to ANSI standard device numbers as defined by ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Standard—Standard for Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers,
Acronyms, and Contact Designations.
Standard Current-based Protection
All versions of the E200 relay provide the following motor protection functions.
• Thermal Overload (51)
• Phase Loss
• Current Imbalance (46)
• Undercurrent – load loss (37)
• Overcurrent – load jam (48)
• Overcurrent – load stall
• Start Inhibit (66)
Ground Fault Current-based Protection
The E200 relay sensing modules and control modules with a ground fault current option provides the following motor protection function:
• Ground Fault – zero sequence method (50 N)
Voltage- and Power-based Protection
The E200 relay sensing modules with voltage sensing provides the following motor protection functions:
• Undervoltage (27)
• Overvoltage (59)
• Phase Reversal (47) – voltage-based
• Over and Under Frequency (81) – voltage-based
• Voltage Imbalance (46)
• Over and Under Power (37)
• Over and Under Leading/Lagging Power Factor (55)
• Over and Under Reactive Power Generated
• Over and Under Reactive Power Consumed
• Over and Under Apparent Power
Thermal-based Protection
The E200 relay provides the following thermal-based motor protection functions:
• Thermistor – PTC (49)
• Stator Protection – RTD (49)
• Bearing Protection – RTD (38)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
21
Chapter 1
Overview
Applications
Use the E200 relay with the following across-the-line starter applications:
• Non-reversing starter
• Reversing starter
• Wye (Star)/Delta starter
• Two-speed motors
• Low and medium voltage with two or three potential transformers
• With or without Phase current transformers
• With or without zero-sequence core balanced current transformer
22
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
2
Diagnostic Station
Navigation Keys
Key
Displaying a Parameter
The E200 Electronic Overload Relay supports a Diagnostic Station on the E200
Expansion Bus (requires Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher). The
Diagnostic Station lets you view any E200 relay parameter and edit any configuration parameter. This chapter explains the navigation keys on the Diagnostic Station, how to view a parameter, how to edit a configuration parameter, and the Diagnostic Station programmable display sequence.
The E200 Diagnostic Station has five navigation keys that are used to navigate through the display menu system and edit configuration parameters.
Description Name
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
• Scroll through the display parameters or groups.
• Increment or decrement values.
Escape
Select
Enter
• Back one step in the navigation menu.
• Cancel a change to a configuration parameter value
• Select the next bit When you view a bit-enumerated parameter.
• Select the next digit when you edit a configuration value.
• Select the next bit when you edit a bit-enumerated parameter.
• Start the navigation menu.
• Advance one step in the navigation menu.
• Display the description for a bit enumerated parameter.
• Edit a configuration parameter value.
• Save the change to the configuration parameter value.
The E200 Diagnostic Station lets you view parameters by using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key. The menu prompts you to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E200 relay system information.
Parameter Group Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the the Groups navigation method and press
key. Use the
.
or keys to select
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
23
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station
24
Use the or keys to select the parameter group to display and press .
Use the or keys to view the parameters that are associated with that group.
When you view a bit-enumerated parameter, press each bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of
to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the parameter group navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
Linear List Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the the Linear List navigation method and press
key. Use the
.
or keys to select
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Diagnostic Station
Chapter 2
Use the press .
or and keys to select the parameter number to display and
Use the or keys to view the next sequential parameter.
When you view a bit-enumerated parameter, press each bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of
to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the linear list navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E200 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
System Info
The E200 Diagnostic Station can display firmware revision information, view the time and date of the E200 relay virtual clock, and edit the time and date of the E200 relay virtual clock. To view E200 relay system information, start the navigation menu by pressing key. Use the or keys to select System Info and press .
Use the or keys to view the E200 relay system information.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
25
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station
To edit the system date or time, press
keys to select the new value. Press
to save the new system values or press restore the previous system values.
to modify the value. Use the or
to select the next system value. Press
to cancel the modification and
Editing Parameters
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E200 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
This section explains how to edit the parameters of the E200 relay.
Editing a Configuration Parameter
The E200 Diagnostic Station lets you edit configuration parameters by using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key. You are prompted to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E200 relay system information. Choose the appropriate method and navigate to the parameter to be modified.
Editing a Numeric Parameter
To edit a configuration parameter, press the
or or press
keys to select the new value. Press
key to modify the value. Use the
to save the new system values
to cancel the modification and restore the previous value.
26
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Diagnostic Station
Chapter 2
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E200 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter
When you edit a bit-enumerated parameter, press the key to view the description of each bit. Use the the next bit. Press
or
to save the new value or press and restore the previous value.
keys to select the new bit value. Press to edit
to cancel the modification
Programmable Display
Sequence
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
This section explains the programmable display sequence of the E200 relay.
Display Sequence
The Diagnostic Station of the E200 relay sequentially displays up to seven screens every 5 seconds.
• Three-phase current
• Three-phase voltage
• Total power
• User-defined screen 1
• User-defined screen 2
• User-defined screen 3
• User-defined screen 4
The three-phase voltage and total power screens are only included in the sequence when the E200 relay has a voltage, current, and ground fault current (VIG)-based
Sensing Module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
27
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station
The user-defined screens let you select up to two parameters per screen. See Diagnostic
Station User-defined Screens on page 39 to configure the Screen# and Parameter#
(Parameters 428…435).
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels any editing modifications, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Stopping the Display Sequence
To stop the display sequence, press sequence through the displays. Press
. Use the or keys to manually
to return to the automatic display sequence.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
Automatic Trip and Warning
Screens
When the E200 relay is in a trip or warning state, the E200 Diagnostic Station automatically displays the trip or warning event.
28
Press any of the navigation keys ( automatic display sequence.
, , , , or ) to return to the
When the trip or warning event clears, the E200 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
If another parameter is displayed and you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the trip or warning screen if the trip or warning event is not cleared.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Device Modes
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter
3
This chapter provides instructions about how to operate and configure an E200
Electronic Overload Relay system. This chapter includes settings for Device Modes,
Option Match, Security Policy, I/O Assignments, Expansion Bus Fault, Emergency
Start, and an introduction to Operating Modes.
This chapter shows you the parameters required to program the device; see page 9 for
information about the complete parameter spreadsheet that is attached to this PDF.
The E200 relay has five device modes to validate configuration of the device and limit when you can configure the E200 relay, perform a firmware update, and issue commands.
• Administration Mode
• Ready Mode
• Run Mode
• Test Mode
• Invalid Configuration Mode
Administration Mode
Administration Mode is a maintenance mode for the E200 relay that lets you configure parameters, modify security policies, perform firmware updates, and issue commands.
Follow these steps to enter Administration Mode:
1. Set the rotary dials on the E200 Communication Module to 7-7-7.
2. Cycle power on the E200 relay
After you complete commissioning activities and maintenance tasks, return the E200 relay back to Ready or Run Mode by setting the rotary dials of the E200 communication module back to their previous positions and then cycle power.
Ready Mode
Ready Mode is a standby mode for the E200 relay in which the relay is ready to help protect an electric motor and no electrical current has been detected. You can modify configuration parameters, update firmware, and issue commands if the appropriate security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the Communication Module and
Operator Stations flash green and bit 14 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) is set to 1 when the device is in Ready Mode.
Run Mode
Run Mode is an active mode for the E200 relay in which the relay is sensing electrical current and is actively protecting an electric motor. Only non-motor protection configuration parameters can be modified if the appropriate security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations is
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
29
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration solid green and bits 3, 4, and/or 5 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) are set to 1 when the device is in Run Mode.
Test Mode
Test Mode is used by installers of motor control centers who are testing and commissioning motor starters with an automation system. A digital input of the E200 relay is assigned to monitor the Test position of the motor control center enclosure.
The Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) are described later in this chapter.
Anyone who commissions motor starters in an automation system can put their motor control center enclosure into the Test position to activate Test Mode and verify that the digital inputs and relay outputs of the E200 relay are operating properly with the motor starter without energizing power to the motor. If the E200 relay senses current or voltage in Test Mode, it generates a Test Mode Trip.
Invalid Configuration Mode
Invalid Configuration Mode is an active mode for the E200 relay in which the relay is in a tripped state due to invalid configuration data. Invalid Configuration Parameter
(Parameter 38) indicates the parameter number that is causing the fault. Invalid
Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) identifies the reason for Invalid Configuration
Mode.
The Trip/Warn LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations flashes a pattern of red, 3 long and 8 short blinks, and bits 0 and 2 in Device Status 0 (Parameter
20) are set to 1 when the device is in Invalid Configuration Mode.
To return to Ready/Run Mode, place a valid configuration value in the parameter that is identified by Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and Invalid
Configuration Cause (Parameter 39). Reset the trip state of the E200 relay by pressing the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via Connected Components
Workbench software, or by an assigned digital input.
Option Match
Due to the modular nature of the E200 relay, you can enable the Option Match feature to verify that the options that you expect for the motor protection application are the ones that are present on the E200 relay system. You can configure an option mismatch to cause a protection trip or provide a warning within the E200 relay.
Enable Option Match Protection Trip (Parameter 186)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a protection trip in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 186 (Control Trip Enable). You can select the specific option match features to cause a protection trip in Parameter 233
(Option Match Action).
Enable Option Match Protection Warning (Parameter 192)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a warning in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 192 (Control Warning Enable).
You can select the specific option match features to cause a warning in Parameter 233
(Option Match Action).
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Control Module Type (Parameter 221)
The E200 relay offers six different control modules. Place the value of the expected control module into Parameter 221. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the control module.
Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222)
The E200 relay offers 12 different sensing modules. Place the value of the expected sensing module into Parameter 222. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the sensing module.
Communication Module Type (Parameter 223)
The E200 relay offers two different communication modules. Place the value of the expected communication module into Parameter 223. A value of (0) disables the
Option Match feature for the communication module.
Operator Station Type (Parameter 224)
The E200 relay offers two different types of operator stations. Place the value of the expected operator station into Parameter 224. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for the operator station. A value of (1),
“No Operator Station”
, makes the operator station not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an operator station to the E200 relay system.
Digital I/O Expansion Modules
Module 1 Type (Parameter 225)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 1 into Parameter 225. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 to the E200 relay system.
Module 2 Type (Parameter 226)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 2 into Parameter 226. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 to the E200 relay system.
Module 3 Type (Parameter 227)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
31
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
32
modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 3 into Parameter 227. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 to the E200 relay system.
Module 4 Type (Parameter 228)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 4 into Parameter 228. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 to the E200 relay system.
Analog I/O Expansion Modules
Module 1 Type (Parameter 229)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 into
Parameter 229. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 1 to the E200 relay system.
Module 2 Type (Parameter 230)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 into
Parameter 230. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 2 to the E200 relay system.
Module 3 Type (Parameter 231)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 into
Parameter 231. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 not allowed on the Expansion
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 3 to the E200 relay system.
Module 4 Type (Parameter 232)
The E200 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 into
Parameter 232. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 4 to the E200 relay system.
Option Match Action (Parameter 233)
The Option Match feature for the E200 relay lets you specify an action when there is an option mismatch—Protection Trip or Warning. Place a (0) in the appropriate bit position for a warning, and place a (1) in the appropriate bit position to cause a protection trip if there is an option mismatch.
Security Policy
Policy Type
Device Configuration
Device Reset
Firmware Update
The E200 relay has a security policy that can be used to prevent anyone with malicious intent to potentially damage a motor or piece of equipment. By default, you can only modify the security policy when the E200 relay is in Administration Mode (see
to learn how to enable Administration Mode).
Table 1 - Security Policy Types
Description
• lets you send external message instructions via a communication network to write values to configuration parameters
• when this policy is disabled, all external message instructions with configuration data return a communication error when the E200 relay is in Ready
Mode or Run Mode
• lets you send external message instruction via a communication network to perform a soft device reset when the E200 relay is in Ready Mode
• when this policy is disabled, all external reset message instructions return a communication error when the E200 relay is in Ready Mode or Run Mode
• lets you update the internal firmware of the communication module and control module via ControlFlash when the E200 relay is in Ready Mode
• when this policy is disabled, firmware updates return a communication error when the E200 relay is in Ready Mode or Run Mode
I/O Assignments
The E200 relay has native digital inputs and relay outputs in the Control Module. This
I/O can be assign to dedicated functions. The following sections list the function assignments for the available Control Module I/O.
Input Assignments
You can assign digital inputs via the following parameters:
• Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196)
• Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197)
• Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198)
• Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
33
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
• Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200)
• Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201)
Output Assignments
You can assign relay outputs via the following parameters:
• Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202)
• Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203)
• Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204)
Output Relay Configuration
States
When assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay, you can configure the E200 relay's output relays to go to a specific safe state when one of following events occur:
• Protection Fault Mode - when a trip event occurs
• Communication Fault Mode - when network communication is lost or an error occurs
• Communication Idle Mode - when a network scanner changes to Idle mode or a
PLC changes to Program mode
IMPORTANT
It is important that you fully understand the use of these parameters and the order of their priority under the conditions of a protection trip, communication fault, and communication idle event.
The default setting for these three modes is to Open/de-energize all E200 output relays that are assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip
Relay.
The E200 output relay states when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or
Control/Control & Trip Relay follow this priority order:
Table 2 - Output Relay Priority
Priority
1
2
3
4
Normal/General Purpose Relay
Output Protection Fault State
Output Communication Fault State
Output Final Fault State
Output Communication Idle State
Control/Control & Trip Relay
Output Communication Fault State
Output Final Fault State
Output Communication Idle State
The optional eight output relays on the digital expansion I/O modules operate as a
Normal/General Purpose relay with the same E200 relay safe state settings. There are two relays per module with maximum of four modules.
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes
When the E200 relay has a trip event, you can configure the E200 output relays to go to a specific state (Open or Closed) or ignore the trip event and continue to operate as
normal. The parameters that are listed in Table 3
configure the Protection Fault Mode for each E200 output relay.
34
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 3 - Protection Fault Mode Parameters
Fault Name
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Action
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Value
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Action
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Action
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Parameter
No.
Description
304
316
• defines how Output Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay responds when a trip event occurs
305 • defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a trip event occurs
310
• defines how Output Relay 1 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay
311 • defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a trip event occurs
• defines how Output Relay 2 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay.
317 • defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a trip event occurs
322
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a trip event occurs
323 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
328
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a trip event occurs
329 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
334
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a trip event occurs
335 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
340
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a trip event occurs
341 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes
When the E200 relay loses communication, experiences a communication bus fault, or has a duplicate node address, you can configure the E200 output relays with the
Communication Fault Mode parameters to go to a specific state (Open or Closed) or hold the last state.
An E200 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher supports the Fault Mode
Output State Duration feature, which can be used with redundant network scanners or control systems. The Fault Mode Output State Duration is the time that the E200 output relays can go to a temporary state (Open, Closed, or Hold Last State) when a communication fault occurs. Configure this temporary state by using the
Communication Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E200 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E200 output relays go to a final fault state (Open or Closed), which you configure by using the Final Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E200 relay and a network scanner or control system is restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E200 output relays resume with the state commanded by the network scanner or control system.
The parameters that are listed in Table 4 configure the Configuration Fault Mode for
each E200 output relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
35
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 4 - Configuration Fault Mode Parameters
Fault Name
Fault Mode Output State Duration
Output Relay 0 Final Fault Value
Output Relay 1 Final Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Final Fault Value
(1)
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Action
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Value
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Action
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Parameter
No.
Description
561
• defines the amount of time (s) that the E200 relay remains in the Communication Fault
Mode state when a communication fault occurs. 0 = forever
• If communication between the E200 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time the E200 output relays go to the final fault state (configured by using Final Fault Mode Parameters
306
• defines how Output Relay 0 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
307 • defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a communication fault occurs
562
312
• defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
• defines how Output Relay 1 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
313 • defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a communication fault occurs
563
• defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
317
• defines how Output Relay 2 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
319 • defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a communication fault occurs
564
324
• defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a communication fault occurs
325 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
565
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
330
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a communication fault occurs
331 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
566
336
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a communication fault occurs
337 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
567
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
342
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a communication fault occurs
343 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
568
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
(1) Available in E200 relay firmware v5.000 and higher.
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes
When a network scanner goes into Idle mode or a PLC goes into Program mode while communicating with an E200 relay, you can configure the E200 output relays to go to a specific state (Open or Close) or hold the last state. The parameters that are listed in
Table 5 configure the Communication Idle Mode for each E200 output relay.
36
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Fault Name
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Action
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Action
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Value
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Action
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value
Table 5 - Communication Idle Mode Parameters
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Parameter
No.
308
309
314
315
320
321
326
327
332
333
338
339
344
345
Description
• defines how Output Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a programmable logic controller (PLC) goes into Program Mode
• defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how Output Relay 1 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how Output Relay 2 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Expansion Bus Fault
The expansion bus of the E200 relay can be used to expand the I/O capabilities of the device with the addition of digital and analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion
Bus Fault lets you have the E200 relay go into a Trip or Warning state when established
Expansion Bus communication is disrupted between the Control Module and any digital and analog expansion I/O modules.
The Expansion Bus Fault is used when the Option Match feature is not enabled for the digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion Bus Fault only monitors for communication disruptions between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. Expansion bus communication disruptions between the Control Module and Operator Station do not affect the Expansion Bus fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
37
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 6 - Expansion Bus Fault Functions
Function
Name
Expansion Bus
Trip
How to
Enable
Set Control
Trip Enable bit 10 to 1
Expansion Bus
Warning
Set Control
Warning
Enable bit
10 to 1
Setting
Parameter No.
186
192
Description
• When communication is disrupted between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E200 relay goes into a tripped state
• When communication is disrupted between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E200 relay goes into a warning state
Trip/Warn Module
Blink Pattern
• Red 3 long and 11 short
• Yellow 3 long and
11 short
To Return to Ready/Run Mode:
• Verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion modules
• When all expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, reset the trip state of the E200 relay by pressing the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via
Connected Components Workbench software, or by an assigned digital input.
• Verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion modules
• When all expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, the warning state of the E200 relay automatically clears
Emergency Start
38
In an emergency, it may be necessary to start a motor even if a protection fault or a communication fault exists. The trip condition may be the result of a thermal overload condition or the number of starts exceeded its configuration. These conditions can be overridden using the Emergency Start feature of the E200 relay.
IMPORTANT
Activating Emergency Start inhibits overload and blocked start protection.
Running in this mode can cause equipment overheating and fire.
To enable the Emergency Start feature in the E200 relay, set the Emergency Start
Enable (Parameter 216) to Enable.
Table 7 - Emergency Start (Parameter 216)
Value
0
1
Description
Disable
Enable
Configure one of the Ptxx Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) to Emergency
Start and activate the corresponding digital input.
Table 8 - Emergency Start Input PTXX Assignment (Parameters 196…201)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E200 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E200 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E200 relay to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
When the Emergency Start feature is active, the following actions occur in the E200 relay:
• Protection trips are ignored
• Output relays configured as Trip Relays are put into closed state
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
• Normal operation resumes with any Normal or Control Relay assigned output relay
• The Emergency Start Active bit is set to 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) bit 6
Language
Analog I/O Expansion
Modules
The E200 relay supports multiple languages when you usethe optional expansion
Operator Diagnostic Station. Parameter text is displayed in the selected language. The language parameter (212) displays the E200 relay parameter text displayed in the selected language.
Diagnostic Station Userdefined Screens
The Diagnostic Station has four user-defined screens that are part of the its display sequence, in which you can define up to two parameters per screen.
Table 9 - User-defined Screen Parameters
Name
Parameter
No.
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 2
(1) You can select one of the 560 available E200 relay parameters.
Description
(1)
428 • the E200 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 1
429 • the E200 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 1
430 • he E200 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 2
431 • the E200 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 2
432 • the E200 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 3
433 • the E200 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 3
434 • the E200 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 4
435 • the E200 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 4
Display Timeout
Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines the time duration in which there is no display navigation activity, and the E200 Diagnostic Station returns to its normal display sequence. Any configuration parameters that were left in an edit state are canceled. A value of zero disables the display timeout function.
The E200 relay supports up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules on the E200
Expansion Bus. The E200 Analog Expansion Module has three independent universal inputs and one analog output.
Analog Input Channels
shows the analog signals that the universal analog inputs can accept.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
39
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Signal Type
Current
Voltage
2-Wire RTD Sensors
3-Wire RTD Sensor
Resistance
Table 10 - Universal Analog Input Signals
Possible Values
0…20 mA
0…10V DC
100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω
Pt 385
0…150 Ω
100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω
Pt 3916
0…750 Ω
1…5V DC
10 Ω Cu 426
0…3000 Ω
100 Ω Ni 618
4…20 mA
0…5V DC
120 Ω Ni 672 604 Ω NiFe 518
0…6000 Ω (PTC and NTC Sensors)
The analog inputs can report data in four different formats. Table 11
display the data ranges for all available analog input types for the four available data formats.
Table 11 - Analog Input Data Format for Current Input Type
Input
Range
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
Input Value Condition
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
4.00 mA
3.00 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
Engineering
Units
21000
20000
4000
3000
21000
20000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
2100
2000
400
300
2100
2000
0
0
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
17407
16383
0
-1024
17202
16383
0
0
Table 12 - Analog Input Data Format for Voltage Input Type
Input
Range
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5V DC
Input Value Condition
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
Engineering
Units
10500
10000
0
0
5250
5000
1000
500
5250
5000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
1050
1000
0
0
525
500
0
0
100
50
525
500
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
17202
16383
0
0
17407
16383
0
-2048
17202
16383
0
0
40
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 13 - Analog Input Data Format for RTD Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt
385
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt
3916
RTD
10 Ω Cu 426
RTD
100 Ω Ni 618
RTD
120 Ω Ni 672
RTD
100 Ω NiFe 518
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
630.0 °C
630.0 °C
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1166.0 °F
1166.0 °F
-328.0 °F
-328.0 °F
850.0 °C
850.0 °C
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1562.0 °F
1562.0 °F
-328.0 °F
-328.0 °F
-80.0 °C
-80.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-112.0 °F
-112.0 °F
200.0 °C
200.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
392.0 °F
392.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
-100
-100
500
500
-148
-148
-148
260
260
-148
260
260
-100
-100
500
500
-328
-328
260
260
-200
-200
1166
1166
-328
-328
630
630
Engineering
Units x 10
850
850
-200
-200
1562
1562
200
200
-100
-100
392
392
-148
-148
-80
-80
500
500
-112
-112
-1480
-1480
2600
2600
-1000
-1000
5000
5000
-1480
-1480
2600
2600
-3280
-3280
2600
2600
-1000
-1000
5000
5000
-3280
-3280
6300
6300
-2000
-2000
11660
11660
Engineering
Units
8500
8500
-2000
-2000
15620
15620
2000
2000
-1000
-1000
3920
3920
-1480
-1480
-800
-800
5000
5000
-1120
-1120
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
41
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 14 - Analog Input Data Format for Resistance Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
Resistance
0…50 Ω
Resistance
0…750 Ω
Resistance
0…3000 Ω
Resistance
0…6000 Ω
(PTC / NTC)
3000.0 Ω
3000.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
6000 Ω
6000 Ω
0 Ω
0 Ω
150.00 Ω
150.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
750.0 Ω
750.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
0
0
30000
30000
0
0
6000
6000
0
0
Engineering
Units
15000
15000
0
0
7500
7500
600
600
0
0
0
0
3000
3000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
1500
1500
750
750
0
0
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
The performance for the input channels of the E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module is dependent on the filter setting for each channel. The total scan time for the input channels of the module is determined by adding the conversion time for all enabled input channels.
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
Table 15 - Analog Input Channel Conversion Time
Current, Voltage,
2-Wire RTD, Resistance
3-Wire RTD
Input Type Filter Frequency
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Conversion Time
153 ms
512 ms
65 ms
37 ms
306 ms
1024 ms
130 ms
74 ms
Example:
• Channel 00 is configured for a 3-wire RTD and 4 Hz filter (conversion time =
1024 ms).
• Channel 01 is configured for 17 Hz voltage (conversion time = 153 ms).
• Channel 02 is configured for 62 Hz current (conversion time = 65 ms).
The E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module input channel scan time is 1242 ms
(1024+153+65).
Analog Output Channel
shows the values that you can program the isolated analog output to provide.
42
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 16 - Universal Analog Output Signals
Signal Type
Current
Voltage
0…20 mA
0…10V DC
Possible Values
1…5V DC
4…20 mA
0…5V DC
The analog outputs can report data as a percent of range.
the data ranges for all available analog output types.
Table 17 - Analog Output Data Format for Current Output Type
Output Range
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
Output Signal
21.000 mA
20.000 mA
4.000 mA
3.000 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Table 18 - Analog Output Data Format for Voltage Output Type
Output Range
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5 V DC
Output Value
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
The analog output can be used to communicate E200 diagnostic information via an analog signal to distributed control systems, programmable logic controllers, or panelmounted analog meters. The analog output can represent one of the following E200 diagnostic parameters:
• Average %FLA
• %TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
• Average L-L Voltage
• Voltage Imbalance
• Total kW
• Total kVAR
• Total kVA
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
43
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 19 - Analog Output Selection Type
Output Selection
Average % FLA
Scaled Average % FLA
% TCU
Ground Fault Current
Internal, 0.50…5.00 A
External, 0.02…0.10 A
External, 0.10…0.50 A
External, 0.20…1.00 A
External, 1.00…5.00 A
Current Imbalance
Average L-L Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Total kW
Total kVAR
Total kVA
Total Power Factor
User-defined Value
Low Range
0%
0%
0%
0.50 A
0.02 A
0.10 A
0.20 A
1.00 A
0%
0V
0%
0 kW
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
-50% (Lagging)
-32768
High Range
100%
200%
100%
5.00 A
0.10 A
0.50 A
1.00 A
5.00 A
100%
(PT Primary) V
100%
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
+50% (Leading)
32767
The E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module output channel update rate is 10 ms.
Analog Modules
Table 20 - Analog Module 1 Channel Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Parameter
No.
Description
437 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 monitors
438 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
439 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
440 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
441 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
442 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
446 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 1 monitors
447 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
448 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
449 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
450
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
451 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
455 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 1 monitors
456 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
457 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
458 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
459
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
460 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
464 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 provides
465 • defines the E200 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
466 • defines the value that Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E200 Expansion Bus fault
467 • defines the value that Output Channel 00 provides when the E200 is in a tripped state
44
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 21 - Analog Module 2 Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Parameter
No.
Description
468 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 monitors
469 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
470 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
471 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
472 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
473 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
477 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 2 monitors
478 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
479 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
480 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
481
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
482 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
486 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 2 monitors
487 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
488 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
489 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
490
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
491 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
464 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 provides
496 • defines the E200 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
497
498
• defines the value that the E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E200
Expansion Bus fault
• defines the value that the E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E200 is in a tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
45
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 22 - Analog Module 3 Channel Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Parameter
No.
Description
499 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 monitors
500 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
501 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
502 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
503 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
504 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
508 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 3 monitors
509 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
510 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
511 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
512
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
513 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
517 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 3 monitors
518 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
519 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
520 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
521
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
522 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
526 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 provides
527 • defines the E200 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
528
529
• defines the value that the E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E200
Expansion Bus fault
• defines the value that the E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E200 is in a tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 23 - Analog Module 4 Channel Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Parameter
No.
Description
530 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 monitors
531 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
532 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
533 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
534 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
535 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
539 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 4 monitors
540 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
541 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
542 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
543
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
544 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
548 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 4 monitors
549 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
550 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
551 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
552
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
556 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
557 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 provides
558 • defines the E200 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
559
560
• defines the value that the E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E200
Expansion Bus fault
• defines the value that the E200 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E200 is in a tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Introduction to Operating
Modes
The E200 relay supports a number of Operating Modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
• Overload
• Non-Reversing Starter
• Reversing Starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) Starter
• Two-Speed Starter
• Monitor
The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195) for the E200 relay is Overload
(Network) in which the E200 relay operates like a traditional overload relay in which one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. Use commands to control any output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays or Control Relays.
Invalid configuration of the output relays causes the E200 relay to go into Invalid
Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip.
describes the functionality of the available Operating Modes for the E200 relay and their associated configuration rules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
47
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Notes:
48
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
4
Operating Modes
The E200 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to 54 operating modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
• Overload
• Non-reversing starter
• Reversing starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) starter
• Two-speed starter
• Monitoring device
This chapter explains the configuration rules, logic, and control wiring that is required for the available operating modes. The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195) for the E200 relay is Overload (Network)—even though the E200 relay is non networked.
In this mode, the E200 relay operates like a traditional overload relay in which one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. Use commands via the operator control/diagnostic station to control any output relays that are assigned as
Normal output relays or Control Relays. Invalid configuration of the output relays causes the E200 relay to go into Invalid Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip.
Overload Operating Modes
The overload-based operating modes of the E200 relay make the device operate as a traditional overload relay, in which it interrupts the control circuit of a contactor coil with a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. There are four overload-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
– Because the E200 is non-networked, the overload outputs cannot be controlled over a network. This default mode allows the device to function as a normally closed overload relay.
• Operator Station
• Local I/O
• Custom
The E200 relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with one of the output relays
configured as a normally closed trip relay. Figure 6 is a wiring diagram of a non-
reversing starter. Relay 0 is configured as a trip relay, and Relay 1 is configured as a normally open control relay, which receives commands to energize the contactor coil from an automation controller.
You can also wire the E200 relay as a control relay so that the relay is controlled by local means and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a nonreversing starter with Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands to energize or de-energize the contactor coil locally or from an external source. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
49
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
50
Figure 6 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
R13
Relay 1
R14 A1
Motor
A2
Relay 0 configured as a trip relay
(1)
R03 R04
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, you can also wire the E200 relay as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication network opens
when a trip event occurs. Figure 7
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with
Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 7 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0 configured as a control relay
(1)
R03 R04
A1
Motor
A2
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Figure 8 - Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Overload (Network)
The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195 = 2) of the E200 relay is
Overload
(Network)
, in which the E200 operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay.
Use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
The E200 relay's default Operating Mode (Parameter 195 = 2) is Network Overload
(note: Since the E200 is non-networked, the overload outputs cannot be controlled over a network.), in which the E200 operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. Use commands locally or via external means to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as normal output relays.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
The reset button of the E300/E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. You must assign one output relay as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the
Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control
Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 2
Overload (Operator Station)
Operating Mode
Overload (Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 26) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Operator Station) operating mode is used when an external source uses the start and stop keys of the E200 Operator
Station for its motor control logic. Use commands locally or via external means to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. You must assign one output relay as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the
Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control
Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
4. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
51
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
52
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 26.
Overload (Local I/O)
Operating Mode
Overload (Local I/O)
(Parameter 195 = 35) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Local I/O) operating mode is used for standalone applications or automation systems that do not use an E200 Operator
Station. Use the digital inputs of the E200 locally for the motor control logic. The
E200 relay can use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays. The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is disabled, and a digital input that is assigned as a trip reset is required.
Rules
1. You must assign one output relay as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the
Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control
Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
4. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
5. Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 35.
Overload (Custom)
Operating Mode
Overload (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 49) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that require customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Non-reversing Starter
Operating Modes
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 49.
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E200 relay provide the control logic for a non-reversing full voltage starter. A normally open control relay controls the contactor coil. When a trip event occurs, the control relay remains open until the E200 receives a trip reset command. There are 15 non-reversing starter-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Operator Station with Feedback
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
• Custom
Non-reversing Starter (Network)
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 = 3) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the nonreversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1.
Program the appropriate state of the starter by using the Network Communication
Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described
.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
53
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
54
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay can be controlled locally
and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 9 is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing
starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 9 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 3.
Timing Diagram
Figure 10 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 4) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay
0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1. Use the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle
parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
to program the appropriate state of the starter.
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired to
Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 11 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 4.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
55
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Feedback
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 12 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Normal Operation Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
56
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station)
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 27) uses the Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
4. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay, and it opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 13 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run 0-Stop
Relay 0
Trip
Trip Reset
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 27.
Timing Diagram
Figure 14 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Start
Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
57
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter
195 = 28) uses the E200 Operator Station “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the nonreversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
4. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
7. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled locally and
opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 15
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired to Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
58
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 15 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run
0-Stop
Feedback IN 0
Relay 0
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Start
Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 28.
Timing Diagram
Figure 16 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter
195 = 36) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
Input 0 is active.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
59
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 to control the starter. When an E200 relay powers up, the starter energizes if Input 0 is active.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
4. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the state of
Input 0 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 17 is a wiring diagram of a non-
reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 17 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run/Stop
IN 0
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 36.
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 18 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 37) uses the state of Input 1 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback operating mode uses the state of Input 1 to control the starter. When the E200 relay powers up, the starter energizes if Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the state if
Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 19 is a wiring diagram of a non-
reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
61
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
62
Figure 19 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
Relay 0
Feedback
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 37.
Timing Diagram
Figure 20 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing
Diagram
Normal Operation Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Run/Stop
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter
195 = 38) uses an active state in Input 1 (normally open momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil, and a de-active state in
Input 0 is used (normally closed push button) to de-energize Output Relay 0. Both
Input 0 and Input 1 are momentary values, so the non-reversing starter only energizes if
Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
4. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is energized when Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active. Output Relay 0 de-energizes when Input 0 is momentarily de-active or when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with three wire control and an Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 21 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Stop
Run
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
Start
Stop
Relay 0
Trip
Trip Reset
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 38.
Timing Diagram
Figure 22 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
63
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
64
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with
Feedback
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control with
Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 39) uses an active state in Input 1 (normally open momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil, and a de-active state in Input 2 is used (normally closed momentary push button) to de-energize Output Relay 0. Both Input 1 and Input 2 are momentary values, so the non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the state if
Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 23 is a wiring diagram of a non-
reversing starter with three wire control and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 23 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Wiring
Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on powerup or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 39.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Feedback IN 0
Relay 0
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 24 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Timing
Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Start
Stop
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195
= 11) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E200 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. Program the appropriate state of the starter by using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
The E200 Operator Station “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter.
Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
To change between Local and Remote control mode, press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E200 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
65
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
66
4. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled locally and
opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 25
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 25 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run 0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 11.
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 12) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E200 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys in local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode.
Program the appropriate state of the starter by using the Network Communication
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
The E200 Operator Station’s “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter.
Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E200 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
4. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled locally and
opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 26
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired into Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
67
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
68
Figure 26 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run 0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 12.
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 16) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 0 in Local control mode to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 1 determines whether the motor starter is in Remote or Local control mode. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. Program the appropriate state of the starter by using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
In Local control mode, the state of Input 0 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 0 is active.
Use Input 1 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 1 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 1 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
3. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
4. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled locally and
opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 27
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 27 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 16.
Timing Diagram
Figure 28 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Two-wire Control
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two
Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 17) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in
Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 3 determines whether the motor starter is in Remote or Local control mode. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. Program the
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
69
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
70
appropriate state of the starter by using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
In Local control mode, the state of Input 2 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 2 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 2 is active.
Use Input 3 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled locally and
opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 29
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 29 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
Run/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 2
IN 3
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 17.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Feedback
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 30 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Timing Diagram
Normal Operation
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station) – Three Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 18) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 1 & Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. Program the appropriate state of the starter by using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to
Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 de-energizes Output Relay 0.
The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
Use Input 3 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
71
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
72
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled locally and
opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 31
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 31 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 18.
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Three-wire Control
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station) with Feedback –
Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 19) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 1 & Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode.
Program the appropriate state of the starter by using the Network Communication
Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to
Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 de-energizes Output Relay 0.
The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
Use Input 3 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled locally and
opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 32
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 32 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Three-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
E200 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 19.
Non-reversing Starter (Custom)
Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 50) operates as a non-reversing starter one output relay that is assigned as a normally open control relay.
The Non-reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
73
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Wiring Diagram
The E200 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay opens when a trip
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 33 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0 configured as a control relay
(1)
R03 R04
A1
Motor
A2
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
Timing Diagram
Figure 34 - Non-reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter Operating
Modes
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E200 relay provide the control logic for a reversing full-voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the forward and reverse contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control relays remain open until the E200 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 reversing starter-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Custom
74
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Reversing Starter (Network)
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 = 5) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1.
Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays are controlled locally
and open when a trip event occurs. Figure 35
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 35 - Reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 5.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
75
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
76
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward
Reverse
Timing Diagram
Figure 36 - Reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 6) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
The auxiliary contact from the forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the reversing contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213), the
E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays are controlled locally
and open when a trip event occurs. Figure 37
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 37 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward Feedback IN 0
Reverse Feedback IN 1
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 6.
Timing Diagram
Figure 38 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Reversing Starter (Operator Station)
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 29) uses the
E200 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key de-energizes Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
77
Chapter 4
Operating Modes release the “I” or “II” button. The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction. The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator
Station disconnects from the base relay.
The E200 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor, and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 39 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
78
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Figure 39 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward
Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 29.
Timing Diagram
Figure 40 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 =
30) uses the E200 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button.The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction. The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
79
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
The auxiliary contact from the reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E200 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
8. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 41 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
80
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 41 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
IN 0
IN 1
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward Feedback
Reverse Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Forward
Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 30.
Timing Diagram
Figure 42 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
81
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
82
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 =
40) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E200 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 43 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 43 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 40.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Forward
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Timing Diagram
Figure 44 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 =
41) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the starter’s reversing contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E200 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
83
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
84
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 45 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 45 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward Feedback
Reverse Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Forward
Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 41.
Timing Diagram
Figure 46 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 =
42) uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay
0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 energizes Output Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 de-energizes Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with three wire control and Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 47 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
IN 2
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 42.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
85
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
86
Timing Diagram
Figure 48 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Forward
Stop
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 13) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, the E200 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay
1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key de-energizes Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button. The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E200 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or E200 Operator Station, and both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 49 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 13.
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 20) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
87
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
88
reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 is used to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction.
Use Input 3 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0 & Input 1. Both output relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 50 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 50 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 20.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 51 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Forward
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 21) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 energizes Output Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 de-energizes
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input
0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
Use Input 3 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
89
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
90
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2. Both
output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 52
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 52 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
IN 2
IN 3
R03
Relay 0
R13
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 21.
Reversing Starter (Custom)
Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 51) operates as a reversing starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally open control relays. The Reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 go to an open state when there is a trip event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 53 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
Timing Diagram
Figure 54 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter Operating
Modes
The two-speed starter-based operating modes of the E200 relay provide the control logic for a two-speed full-voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the high-speed and low-speed contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control relays remain open until the E200 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 twospeed starter-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Custom
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
91
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
92
Two-speed Starter (Network)
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 = 9) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output
Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this configuration,
both relays are controlled locally and open when a trip event occurs. Figure 55
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 55 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 9.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 56 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Trip Event
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
Operating Mode
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 10) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
The auxiliary contact from the high-speed contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the low-speed contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output
Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this configuration,
both relays are controlled locally and open when a trip event occurs. Figure 57
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
93
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
94
configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and
Input 1.
Figure 57 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 10.
Timing Diagram
Figure 58 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station)
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 33) uses the
E200 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output Relay 0, which controls the highspeed contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay 1, which controls the lowspeed contactor coil. The “0” key de-energizes Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The E200 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor, and Output
Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 59 is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
95
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
96
Figure 59 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I-Run Fast
II-Run Slow
0-Stop
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 33.
Timing Diagram
Figure 60 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Stop
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 =
34) uses the E200 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
The auxiliary contact from the two-speed starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E200 Operator Station Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
8. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output
Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 61 is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
97
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Figure 61 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
IN 0
IN 1
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Run Fast
Stop
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 34.
Timing Diagram
Figure 62 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 =
46) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E200 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output
Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 63 is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 63 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 46.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
99
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
100
Timing Diagram
Figure 64 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 =
47) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s high-speed contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the starter’s low-speed contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), the E200 Relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E200 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output
Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 65 is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 65 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 2
IN 3
R03
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
Relay 0
R13
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 47.
Timing Diagram
Figure 66 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
101
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
102
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195
= 48) uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output
Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 energizes Output Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 de-energizes Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with three-wire control and
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 67 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 48.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Run Fast
Stop
Timing Diagram
Figure 68 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station)
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 =
15) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, the E200 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output
Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. The “0” key de-energizes Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the twospeed starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E200 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E200 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E200 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
103
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
104
Rules
1. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
2. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the E200 Operator Station. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 69 is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 69 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 15.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 =
24) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 is used to control Output Relay
1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input
1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input
0 or Input 1 is active.
Use Input 3 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by Input 0 and Input 1. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 70 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
E200 Relay
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
105
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
106
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 24.
Timing Diagram
Figure 71 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 =
25) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. Program the appropriate state of the starter using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 energizes Output Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 de-energizes
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and
Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Use Input 3 to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E200 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2. Both
output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 72 is a wiring diagram of a two-
speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 72 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
R03
R13
E200 Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 25.
Two-Speed Starter (Custom)
Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 53) operates as a twospeed starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally open control relays.
The Two-speed Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that require customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
2. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
107
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 go to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 73 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E200 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E200 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 53.
Timing Diagram
Figure 74 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Monitor Operating Mode
The monitor-based operating mode of the E200 relay lets you disable all protection features of the E200 relay. Use the E200 relay as a monitoring device to report current, voltage, power, and energy information.
There is one monitor based operating mode – Custom.
Monitor (Custom)
Operating Mode
Monitor (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 54) lets you use the E200 relay as a monitoring device. No configuration rules apply in this operating mode if all motor protection features are disabled.
Rules
108
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
1. If any protection trip events are enabled (excluding Configuration, NVS, and
Hardware Fault trip), then set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters
202…204) to the appropriate value of Trip Relay, Control Relay, Monitor Lx
Trip Relay, or Monitor Lx Control Relay.
Wiring Diagram
Not Applicable
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
109
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Notes:
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter
5
Current Protection
This chapter provides detailed information about the protective trip and warning functions of the E200 Electronic Overload Relay. The protective trip and warning functions are organized into five sections:
•
Current-based
•
Voltage-based
•
Power-based
•
Control-based
•
Analog-based
This chapter explains the trip and warning protection features of the E200 relay and the associated configuration parameters.
The E200 relay digitally monitors the electrical current that is consumed by an electric motor. This electric current information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Overload Trip/Warning
•
Phase Loss Trip
•
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
•
Stall Trip
•
Jam Trip/Warning
•
Underload Trip/Warning
•
Current Imbalance Trip/Warning
•
Line Under Current Trip/Warning
•
Line Over Current Trip/Warning
•
Line Loss Trip/Warning
Current Trip Enable (Parameter 183) and Current Warning Enable (Parameter 189) are used to enable the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) and Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Current Trip
The E200 relay trips with an current-based indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Overload trip protection is enabled
•
Current is present
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilized reaches 100%
If the E200 relay trips, the:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
111
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
112
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Current Warning
The E200 relay indicates an current-based warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Overload warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilized is equal to or greater than the warning level
When the overload warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a yellow short-1 blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as warning alarm close
Overload Protection
The E200 relay provides overload protection through true RMS current measurements of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on the highest current measured, the programmed FLA Setting, and Trip Class, a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated. Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
.
(Parameter 1) reports this calculated value and can be read via the communication network
Parameter Name
Overload Trip
Full Load Amps Setting
Trip Class
Automatic/Manual Reset
Parameter Number Description
4
20
171
Indicate a trip
Define the motor’s full-load current rating.
177
172
173
Define the high-speed FLA value in two-speed motor applications. Activating FLA2 is described in
.
Trip Class is the second of two parameters that affect the thermal capacity utilization algorithm of the E200 relay. Trip class is defined as the maximum time (in seconds) for an overload trip to occur when the motor’s operating current is six times its rated current. The E200 relay offers an adjustable trip class range of 5…30. Enter the application trip class into Trip Class
(Parameter 172).
Select the reset mode for the E200 relay after an overload or thermistor (PTC) trip. If an overload trip occurs and automatic reset mode is selected, the E200 relay automatically resets when the value stored in % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) falls below the value stored in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174). If manual reset mode is selected, the E200 Overload Relay can be manually reset after the % Thermal Capacity Utilized is less than the OL Reset Level.
Overload Warning
10
20
Overload Warning Level 175
Indicate a warning
Define an alert for an impending overload trip and is adjustable from 0…100% TCU.
Time to Trip
Time to Reset
Nonvolatile Thermal
Memory
2
174
1
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E200 relay, Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2) indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the measured current is below the trip rating, the Overload
Time to Trip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.
After an overload trip, the E200 relay reports the time remaining until the device can be reset through Overload Time to Reset
(Parameter 3). When the % Thermal Capacity Utilized value falls to or below the Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the
Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the Overload Time to
Reset value is reported as 0 seconds.
The E200 relay includes a nonvolatile circuit to provide thermal memory. The time constant of the circuit corresponds to a Trip
Class 20 setting. During normal operation, the thermal memory circuit is continuously monitored and updated to accurately reflect the thermal capacity utilization of the connected motor. If power is removed, the thermal memory of the circuit decays at a rate equivalent to the cooling of a Trip Class 20 application. When the power is re-applied, the E200 relay checks the thermal memory circuit voltage to determine the initial value of % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1).
Full Load Current Guidelines
USA and Canada Guidelines
•
Motor Service Factor ≥ 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating of 1.15 or greater, program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Motor Service Factor < 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating less than 1.15, program the FLA setting to 90% of the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Wye-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the application’s service factor instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by
1.73.
Outside USA and Canada Guidelines
•
Maximum Continuous Rated (MCR) Motors: Program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Star-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the MCR instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by 1.73.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
113
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
114
Trip Curves
The following figures illustrate the time-current characteristics for trip classes 5, 10, 20, and 30 of the E200 relay.
Figure 75 - Time-Current Characteristics for Trip Classes 5, 10, 20, and 30
1000
Trip Class 5
1000
Trip Class 10
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
100
100
10
10
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 20
10000
1000%
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 30
1000%
10000
1000
1000
100
100
10
10
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
1000%
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
1000%
For trip class time-current characteristics other than 5, 10, 20, or 30, scale the Class 10 trip time according to the following table:
Table 24 - Time-Current Characteristic Scaling Factors
Trip Class
8
9
10
11
12
13
5
6
7
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
0.5
Trip Class
17
18
19
20
21
22
14
15
16
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.2
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
1.4
Trip Class
26
27
28
23
24
25
29
30
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
2.3
2.9
3.0
Automatic/Manual Reset Times
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174) is adjustable from 1…100% TCU. The following figures illustrate the typical overload reset time delay when Overload Reset Level is set to
75% TCU.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Figure 76 - Overload Reset Times
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Time to Reset in Seconds
100
70
60
90
80
50
0
Trip Class 5
100 200 300
Time to Reset in Seconds
400 500
Trip Class 10 Trip Class 20 Trip Class 30
ATTENTION:
In explosive environment applications, Overload Reset Mode
(Parameter 173) must be set to Manual.
ATTENTION:
In an explosive environment application, Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174) must be set as low as possible or in accordance with the motor thermal time constant.
Phase Loss Protection
A high current imbalance, or phase failure, can be caused by defective contacts in a contactor or circuit breaker, loose terminals, blown fuses, sliced wires, or faults in the motor. When a phase failure exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise or excessive mechanical vibration. This may result in a degradation of the motor insulation or increased stress on the motor bearings. Rapid phase loss detection helps to minimize the potential damage and loss of production.
Parameter Name
Phase Loss Trip
Phase Loss Inhibit Time 239
Phase Loss Trip Delay
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
240
Inhibit a phase loss trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
IMPORTANT
The phase loss inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for a phase loss condition until the Phase Loss Inhibit Time expires.
Define the time period for which a phase loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
115
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Ground Fault Current Protection
In isolated or high impedance-grounded systems, core-balanced current sensors are typically used to detect low-level ground faults caused by insulation breakdowns or entry of foreign objects. Detection of such ground faults can be used to interrupt the system to prevent further damage or to alert the appropriate personnel to perform timely maintenance.
The E200 relay provides core-balanced ground fault current detection capability, with the option of enabling Ground Fault Trip, Ground Fault Warning, or both. The ground fault detection method and range depends upon the catalog number of the E200 Sensing
Module and Control Module ordered.
Table 25 - Ground Fault Capabilities
Catalog Number Ground Fault Method
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
Range
193-ESM-IG-__-__
592-ESM-IG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-EIOGP-22-___
193-EIOGP-42-___
Internal
External
(1)
(1) You must use one of the following Catalog Number 193-CBCT_ Core Balance Ground Fault Sensors :
0.5…5.0 A
0.02…5.0 A
1 — Ø 20 mm window
2 — Ø 40 mm window
3 — Ø 65 mm window
4 — Ø 85 mm window
ATTENTION:
The E200 relay is not a ground fault circuit interrupter for personnel protection (or Class I) as defined in Article 100 of the NEC.
ATTENTION:
The E200 relay is not intended to signal a disconnecting means to open the faulted current. A disconnecting device must be capable of interrupting the maximum available fault current of the system on which it is used.
116
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Name
Ground Fault Trip
Ground Fault Type‘
Ground Fault Maximum Inhibit 248
Ground Fault Filter
Parameter Number Description
4
20
241
Indicate a trip
Select the internal option or the external option with the appropriate measurement range.
247
Inhibits a ground fault trip from occurring when the ground fault current exceeds the maximum range of the core-balance sensor (approximately 6.5 A).
Ground faults can quickly rise from low-level arcing levels to short circuit magnitudes. A motor starting contactor may not have the necessary rating to interrupt a high magnitude ground fault. In these circumstances it is desirable for an upstream circuit breaker with the proper rating to interrupt the ground fault.
An E200 relay can filter ground fault currents for High Resistance Grounded (HRG) systems from its current-based protection trip and warning functions, which include:
•
Thermal overload
•
Current imbalance
•
Jam
•
Stall
Ground Fault Inhibit Time
Ground Fault Trip Delay
242
243
The Ground Fault Filter is useful for smaller-sized motors that trip unexpectedly due to a controlled ground fault current that is significant relative to the current draw of the electric motor.
This filter only disables the effects of the ground fault current from the current-based motor protection trip and warning functions. Current-based diagnostic data is reported unfiltered when this feature is enabled.
Inhibit a ground fault trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 s. The ground fault inhibit time begins when the Current Present (bit 3) or Ground Fault Current Present (bit 4) is set in
Device Status 0 (Parameter 20).
Define the time period a ground fault condition must be present before a trip occurs and is adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s.
Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244) lets you define the ground fault current in which the E200 relay trips and is adjustable from:
•
0.500…5.00 A (Internal)
•
0.020…5.00 A (External)
Ground Fault Trip Level 244
Ground Fault Warning
Ground Fault Warning Level
Ground Fault Warning Delay
10
20
246
245
IMPORTANT
The ground fault inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum
FLA rating of the device or the ground fault current is greater than or equal to 50% of the minimum ground fault current rating of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for a ground fault condition until the Ground Fault Current
Inhibit Time expires.
Indicate a warning
Define the ground fault current at which the E200 relay indicates a warning and is adjustable from 0.20…5.00 A.
Define the time period (adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s) for which a ground fault condition must be present before a warning occurs.
Stall Protection
A motor stalls when its inrush current lasts for a longer than normal period of time during its starting sequence. As a result, the motor heats up rapidly and reaches the temperature limit of its insulation. Rapid stall detection during the starting sequence can extend the motor’s life, and minimize potential damage and loss of production. The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Stall Trip function and stop the motor before damage and loss of production can occur.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
117
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Stall Trip
Stall Enabled Time
Stall Trip Level
Parameter Name
Jam Trip
Jam Inhibit Time
Jam Trip Delay
Jam Trip Level
Jam Warning
Jam Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
249
250
Adjust the time the E200 relay monitors for a stall condition during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the locked rotor current and is adjustable from 100…600% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
Stall Protection is only enabled during the motor starting sequence. If the maximum phase of load current falls below the programmed Stall Trip Level before the Stall Enabled Time elapses, the E200 relay disables Stall Protection until the next motor starting sequence.
IMPORTANT
The E200 relay considers a motor to have begun its starting sequence if the maximum phase of motor current transitions from 0A to approximately 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
Jam Protection
A motor goes into a jam condition when a running motor begins to consume current greater than50% of the motor’s nameplate rating. An example of this condition could be an overloaded conveyor or jammed gear. These conditions can result in the overheating of the motor and equipment damage. The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Jam Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid jam fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
251
252
253
Inhibit a jam trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period a jam condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Define the current at which the E200 relay trips on a jam. It is user adjustable from 50…600% of the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Jam Inhibitor timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA
SETTING of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for a jam condition until the Jam Inhibit Time expires.
10
20
Indicate a warning
254
Define the current at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 50…600% for the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Jam Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Jam Inhibit Time has expired, the Jam Warning indication is instantaneous.
Underload Protection
Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction in the installation, such as a torn conveyor belt, damaged fan blade, broken shaft, or worn tool.
Such conditions may not harm the motor, but they can lead to loss of production. Rapid underload fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.
The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Underload Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid underload fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
118
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Name
Underload Trip
Underload Inhibit Time
Underload Trip Delay
Underload Trip Level
Underload Warning
Underload Warning Level
Parameter Number Description
4
20
255
Indicate a trip
Inhibit an underload trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
256
257
Define the time period an underload condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Define the current at which the E200 relay trips on an underload. It is user adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Underload Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum
FLA SETTING of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an underload condition until the Underload
Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the Underload Trip Level (Parameter 246) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the E200 relay’s current measurement capability.
10
20
Indicate a warning
258
Define the current at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Underload Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Underload Inhibit Time has expired, the
Underload Warning indication is instantaneous.
Current Imbalance Protection
A current imbalance can be caused by an imbalance in the voltage supply, unequal motor winding impedance, or long and varying wire lengths. When a current imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy. The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Current Imbalance Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid current imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Current Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%CI = 100% * (I d where
/I a
)
I
I
%CI = Percent Current Imbalance d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Current a
= Average Current
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
119
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Current Imbalance Trip
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time 259
Current Imbalance Trip Delay
Current Imbalance Trip Level
260
261
Inhibit a current imbalance trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period a current imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) lets you define the percentage at which the E200 relay trips on a current imbalance. It is user adjustable from 10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for a current imbalance condition until the Current
Imbalance Inhibit Time expires.
Current Imbalance Warning
10
20
Indicate a warning
Current Imbalance Warning
Level
262
Define the percentage at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Current Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Current Imbalance Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Undercurrent Protection
For non-motor applications, if the measured current is less than a specific level for a specific phase, it may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E200 relay can monitor for an undercurrent condition per phase with its Line Under
Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid under current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Name
Under Current Trip
Under Current Inhibit Time
L1 Under Current Trip Delay
L2 Under Current Trip Delay
L3 Under Current Trip Delay
L1 Under Current Trip Level
L2 Under Current Trip Level
L3 Under Current Trip Level
Under Current Warning
L1 Under Current Warning Level
L2 Under Current Warning Level
L3 Under Current Warning Level
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip for L1, L2, or L3
265
Inhibit an L1, L2, or L3 Under Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
266
269
272
Define the time period an L1 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
267
270
273
Define the current at which the E200 relay trips on a L1 Under Current. It is user adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA
Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the
Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the L1 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 267) is dependent on the FLA
Setting and the lower limit of the E200 relay’s current measurement capability
10
20
Indicate a warning
268
271
274
Define the current at which the E200 relay indicates a L1 Under Current warning. It is user adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Under Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
120
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Name
Over Current Inhibit Time
Over Current Trip
L1 Over Current Trip Delay
L2 Over Current Trip Delay
L3 Over Current Trip Delay
L1 Over Current Trip Level
L2 Over Current Trip Level
L3 Over Current Trip Level
Over Current Warning
L1 Over Current Warning Level
L2 Over Current Warning Level
L3 Over Current Warning Level
Line Overcurrent Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is greater than a specific level for a specific phase may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element. Such conditions could harm the power system over time, which could lead to loss of production.
The E200 relay can monitor for an overcurrent condition per phase with its Line Over
Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid over current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
275
Over Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 275) lets you inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Over Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
4
20
276
279
282
Indicates a trip forL1, L2, or L3
Define the time period an L1 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
277
280
283
Define the current at which the E200 relay trips on a L1 Over Current. It is user adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA
Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum
FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the Over Current
Inhibit Time expires.
10
20
Indicate a warning
278
281
284
Define the current at which the E200 relay indicates a L1 Over Current warning. It is user adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The L1 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Line Loss Trip
Line Loss Inhibit Time
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay
L2 Line Loss Trip Delay
L3 Line Loss Trip Delay
Line Loss Warning
Line Loss Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is 0 amps a specific phase, this may indicate an electrical malfunction such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E200 relay can monitor for a current-based line loss per phase with its Line Loss Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid line loss in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicates a trip for L1, L2, or L3
285
286
287
288
4
20
Inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 276) lets you define the time period an L1 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see
Input Assignment Parameters 196-201). The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for Line Loss condition until the Line
Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
Indicate a warning
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1
Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
121
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Voltage Protection
The E200 relay can digitally monitor the voltage supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor voltage quality. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage is either too high, too low, or wrong rotation. The following E200 Sensing
Modules provide voltage monitoring capabilities.
Table 26 - Voltage Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
Internal 20…800V
Internal
External
20…800V
20…6500V
This voltage information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Undervoltage trip/warning
•
Overvoltage trip/warning
•
Voltage imbalance trip/warning
•
Phase rotation mismatch trip
•
Under frequency trip/warning
•
Over frequency trip/warning
Voltage Trip Enable (Parameter 184) and Voltage Warning Enable (Parameter 190) are used to enable the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) and Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) are used to view the status of the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Voltage Trip
The E200 relay trips with a voltage indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
A voltage trip is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
A voltage inhibit time has expired
•
The minimum phase voltage is less than the trip level for a time period greater than the trip delay.
If the E200 relay trips on a voltage, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
122
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Voltage Warning
The E200 relay indicates a voltage warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
A voltage warning is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
A voltage condition exists
•
Inhibit Time has expired
When the voltage warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a warning alarm close
Undervoltage Protection
Electric motors consume more electric current when the voltage supplied to the motor is lower than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Under
Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for low voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
123
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under Voltage Trip
Under Voltage Inhibit Time
Under Voltage Trip Delay
Under Voltage Trip Level
Under Voltage Warning
Under Voltage Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
355
356
Inhibit an under voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period an under voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
357
Define the voltage at which the E200 relay trips on an under voltage. It is user adjustable from 0…6553.5V.
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under voltage condition until the Under Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
11
20
Indicate a warning
358
Under Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 358) lets you define the voltage at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…6553.5 V.
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under Voltage Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Over Voltage Trip
Over Voltage Inhibit Time
Over Voltage Trip Delay
Over Voltage Trip Level
Over Voltage Warning
Over Voltage Warn Level
Overvoltage Protection
The winding insulation for electric motors degrades faster when more voltage is supplied to the motor than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Over
Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for high voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
359
360
361
Inhibit an over voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period an over voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Define the voltage at which the E200 relay trips on an over voltage. It is user adjustable from 0…6553.5V.
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an over voltage condition until the Over Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
11
20
Indicate a warning
362
Define the voltage at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…6553.5V.
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Over Voltage Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
124
Voltage Imbalance Protection
A voltage imbalance can be caused by poor power quality and unequal distribution of power. When a voltage imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy. The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Voltage Imbalance
Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid voltage imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Voltage Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%V
Imb
= 100% * (V d
/V a
)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
where
%V
Imb
= Percent Voltage Imbalance
V d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Voltage
V a
= Average Voltage
Parameter Name
Voltage Imbalance Trip
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time 365
Indicate a trip
Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay
Voltage Imbalance Trip Level
366
367
Inhibit a voltage imbalance trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period a voltage imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Define the percentage at which the E200 relay trips on a voltage imbalance. It is user adjustable from 10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for a voltage imbalance condition until the Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time expires.
Voltage Imbalance Warning
11
20
Indicate a warning
Voltage Imbalance Warning
Level
368
Define the percentage at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Voltage Imbalance Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Phase Rotation Trip
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time
Phase Rotation Trip Type
Phase Rotation Protection
Wiring of a three-phase voltage system can affect the rotational direction of an electric motor. The E200 relay can help protect against the improper phase rotation so that an electric motor rotates in the proper direction, ABC or ACB, to prevent equipment from being damaged.
Parameter Number Description
5
20
363
Indicate a trip
364
Inhibit a phase rotation mismatch trip and warning from occurring. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the required voltage phase rotation for the motor application. E200 relay trips on a phase rotation mismatch when this parameter does not match the measured voltage phase rotation. It is user adjustable, ABC or ACB.
IMPORTANT
The Phase Rotation Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for a phase rotation mismatch condition until the Phase Rotation Inhibit Time expires.
Frequency Protection
The E200 relay can help protect against poor voltage quality by offering frequency-based protection. This protection is used when electric power is provided by stand-alone electric generators. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage frequency is either too high or too low. The E200 relay can monitor for this condition with its Over and Under Frequency Trip and Warning function, and it can detect for an improper voltage frequency to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
125
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under Frequency Trip
Under Frequency Inhibit Time
Under Frequency Trip Delay
Under Frequency Trip Level
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
369
370
371
Inhibit an under frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period an under frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Define the frequency at which the E200 relay trips on an under frequency. It is user adjustable from 46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Under Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under frequency condition until the Under Frequency Inhibit Time expires.
Under Frequency Warning
11
20
Indicate a warning
Under Frequency Warn Level 372
Define the frequency at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Under Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under Frequency Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Over Frequency Trip
Over Frequency Inhibit Time
Over Frequency Trip Delay
Over Frequency Trip Level
Over Frequency Warning
Over Frequency Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
373
374
Inhibit an over frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period an over frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
375
Define the frequency at which the E200 relay trips on an over frequency. It is user adjustable from 46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an over frequency condition until the Over Frequency Inhibit Time expires.
11
20
Indicate a warning
376
Over Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 376) lets you define the frequency at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Over Frequency Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
Power Protection
126
The E200 relay can digitally monitor the power that is supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor power quality or alert you when power consumed by the motor differs from what is expected. This protection is useful for pump cavitation and pump material change detection. The following E200 Sensing Modules provide power monitoring capabilities.
Table 27 - Power Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
Internal 20…800V
Internal
External
20…800V
20…6500V
This power information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Under Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
•
Over Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
•
Under Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
•
Over Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
•
Under Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
•
Over Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
•
Under Power Factor Trip/Warning
•
Over Power Factor Trip/Warning
Power Trip Enable (Parameter 185) and Power Warning Enable (Parameter 191) are used to enable the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) and Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) are used to view the status of the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Power Trip
The E200 relay trips with power indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
A power trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Power inhibit time has expired
•
The total power is less than the trip level for a time period greater than the trip delay.
If the E200 relay trips on power, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
127
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Power Warning
The E200 relay indicates a power warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
A Power warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Power inhibit time has expired
•
The power is equal to or less than the warning level
When the power warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Real Power (kW) Protection
The E200 relay can help protect against real power (kW) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the real power (kW) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
128
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Name
Under kW Trip
Under kW Inhibit Time
Under kW Trip Delay
Under kW Trip Level
Under kW Warning
Under kW Warn Level
Parameter Name
Over kW Trip
Over kW Inhibit Time
Over kW Trip Delay
Over kW Trip Level
Over kW Warning
Over kW Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
378
379
380
Inhibit an under real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period an under real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Define the real power (kW) at which the E200 relay trips on an under real power (kW). It is user adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under real power (kW) condition until the Under kW Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
381
Define the real power (kW) at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under kW Inhibit Time has expired, the
Under kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
382
383
384
Inhibit an over real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period an over real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Define the total real power (kW) at which the E200 relay trips on over real power (kW). It is user adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an over real power (kW) condition until the Over kW Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
385
Define the real power (kW) at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Over kW Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection
The E200 relay can help protect against reactive power (kVAR) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the reactive power (kVAR) of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
129
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under kVAR Consumed Trip
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit
Time
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
386
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay 387
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level 388
Inhibit an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E200relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVAR Consumed Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under kVAR Consumed Warn
Level
389
Define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under kVAR consumed Inhibit
Time has expired, the Under kVAR Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
Under kVAR Generated Trip
6
20
Indicate a trip
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit
Time
394
Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay 395
Under kVAR Generated Trip Level 396
Inhibit Time (Parameter 394) lets you inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E200 relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) generated. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVAR Generated Warning
12
20
Indicate a warning
Under kVAR Generated Warn
Level
397
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 397) lets you define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under kVAR generated Inhibit
Time has expired, the Under kVAR Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection
The E200 relay can help protect against apparent power (kVA) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the apparent power (kVA) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
130
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Name
Under kVA Trip
Under kVA Inhibit Time
Under kVA Trip Delay
Under kVA Trip Level
Under kVA Warning
Under kVA Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
402
403
404
Inhibit an under apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period an under apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Under kVA Trip Level (Parameter 404) lets you define the apparent power (kVA) at which the E200 relay trips on an under apparent power (kVA). It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under apparent power (kVA) condition until the Under kVA Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
405
Under kVA Warn Level (Parameter 405) lets you define the apparent power (kVA) at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired, the
Under kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Power Factor Protection
The E200 relay can help protect against power factor for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the power factor of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
131
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
Under Power Factor Lagging
Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
Delay
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
Level
Under Power Factor Lagging
Warning
Under Power Factor Lagging
Warn Level
Under Power Factor Leading Trip
Under Power Factor Leading
Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Leading Trip
Delay
Under Power Factor Leading Trip
Level
Under Power Factor Leading
Warning
Under Power Factor Leading
Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
410
411
412
Inhibit an under power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period an under power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Define the power factor lagging at which the E200 relay trips on an under power factor lagging. It is user adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor lagging condition until the Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
413
Define the power factor lagging at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under Power Factor
Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is instantaneous.
6
20
Indicate a trip
418
419
420
Inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period an under power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Define the power factor leading at which the E200 relay trips on an under power factor leading. It is user adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E200 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor leading condition until the Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
421
Define the power factor leading at which the E200 relay indicates a warning. It is user adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. After the Under Power Factor
Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Leading Warning indication is instantaneous.
Control Protection
132
The E200 relay provides a number of control-based protection functions including:
•
Test Trip
•
Operator Station Trip
•
Remote Trip
•
Start Inhibit
•
Preventive Maintenance
•
Configuration Trip
•
Option Match Trip/Warning
•
Expansion Bus Trip/Warning
•
Non Volatile Storage Trip
•
Test Mode Trip
Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186) and Control Warning Enable (Parameter 192) are used to enable the respective control-based protective trip and warning functions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) and Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Control Trip
The E200 relay trips with a control-based indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
A control-based protection is enabled
•
You press the blue reset button on the Communication Module for more than 3 seconds.
If the E200 relay trips on a control, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Control Warning
The E200 relay provides a warning indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Warning condition exists
If the E200 relay warns, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a warning alarm closes
Test Trip
The E200 relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Trip state. You can implement this feature when commissioning a motor control circuit to verify the response of the E200 relay, its associated Expansion I/O modules, and the networked automation system.
Parameter Name
Test Trip
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
133
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Thermistor (PTC) Protection
The following E200 relay control modules can accept up to 6 thermistors (PTC) temperature sensors wired in series to monitor the temperature of a motor’s windings, rotor, and/or bearings.
•
193-EIOGP-42-24D
•
193-EIOGP-22-120
•
193-EIOGP-22-240
The thermistor (PTC) based temperature sensors connect to the IT1 and IT2 terminals of the E200 Control Module.If the E200 relay trips on a thermistor.
Parameter Name
Thermistor (PTC) Trip
Thermistor (PTC) Warning
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
13
20
Indicate a warning
DeviceLogix Protection
An E200 relay is equipped with a DeviceLogix logic engine. You can create custom logic
programs for distributed motor control applications. See Chapter 8
for more information on DeviceLogix. DeviceLogix provides you with the capability to create a customized protection algorithm that can generate a trip or warning event.
Parameter Name
DeviceLogix Trip
DeviceLogix Warning
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
13
20
Indicate a warning
Operator Station Trip
The E200 relay provides the capability to plug and play its optional operator stations. The operator station protection feature trips the E200 relay when you press the red 0 (stop) button. This feature is a failsafe mechanism to let you de-energize a contactor coil anytime the red 0 (stop) button is pressed.
Operator Station Trip should be disabled when an operator station is being used to send start and stop signals to an automation control system.
Parameter Name
Operator Station Trip
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
You can also press the red O button on an operator station to trigger a trip.
Remote Trip
The E200 relay provides the capability to remotely cause the E200 relay to trip via a
network command or assigned digital input on the Control Module (see Chapter 3
for
134
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Parameter Name
Remote Trip
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
digital input assignments). This feature allows the capability of tripping the E200 relay from a remote source such as a vibration switch or external monitoring relay.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
A trip can also occur when a Control Module’s digital input with a remote trip assignment is activated or the
Communication Module receives a remote trip command from the communication network
Parameter Name
Blocked Start Trip
Starts Per Hour
Starts Interval
Starts Available
Time to Start
Start Inhibit Protection
This protective function lets you limit the number of starts in a given time period and limit the operating hours for an electric motor. A start is defined as the E200 relay sensing a transition in current from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA rating of the device. The
Blocked Start protective function is set by Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205) and/or Starts
Interval (Parameter 206).
Parameter Number Description
7
20
205
Indicate a trip
Number of starts within the last hour (60 minutes). This value is adjustable from 0…120 starts.
206
30
31
Time that you must wait between starts. This value is adjustable from 0…3600 seconds.
Number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events.
Amount of the time remaining until a new start can be issued. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.
Parameter Name
Number of Starts Warning
Total Starts
Starts Counter
Operating Hours Warning
Total Operating Hours
Operating Time
Preventive Maintenance
The E200 relay offers preventive maintenance warnings based on the number of start cycles and the number of operating hours. These warnings can be used to alert you that the number of starts or number of operating hours has been reached, and it is time to perform preventive maintenance.
Parameter Number Description
13
20
207
Indicate a warning
Set the number of starts until the starts counter warning occurs.
29
Number of times a motor has been started. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function
Clear Operating Statistics
.
13
20
208
28
Indicate a warning
Set the number operating hours that a motor can operate until the operating hours warning occurs.
Number hours that a motor has been running. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function
Clear Operating Statistics
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
135
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Hardware Fault
The E200 relay continuously monitors the status of the Control, Sensing, and
Communication Modules. The E200 relay issues a hardware fault trip if there is an issue with the Control, Sensing, and Communication Modules or if one of the modules is missing or incompatible. The Hardware Fault Trip is always enabled.
Parameter Name
Hardware Fault Trip
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
Parameter Name
Feedback Timeout
Contactor Feedback Trip
Contactor Feedback Warning
Contactor Feedback Protection
An E200 relay can control motors using its Operating Modes. Select one of the pre-programmed Operating Modes that monitor the feedback status of a contactor by wiring the auxiliary contacts of the contactor into one of the digital inputs of the E200
for more information on Operating Modes.
7
20
13
20
Parameter Number Description
213
Amount time in milliseconds a Feedback based Operating Mode waits to receive a contactor feedback signal after the contactor has been issued an energize command.
Indicate a trip
Indicate a warning
Parameter Name
Test Mode Trip
136
Nonvolatile Storage Fault
The E200 relay continuously monitors the status of its nonvolatile storage. The E200 relay issues a nonvolatile storage fault trip if there is an issue with its nonvolatile storage or if it becomes corrupt. The Nonvolatile Storage Fault Trip is always enabled.
Parameter Name
Nonvoltaile Storage Fault Trip
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
Test Mode Trip
Some motor control center enclosures include a Test Position in which the motor power is disconnected from the enclosure, but the control power is still active. This allows motor control center commissioning staff to verify that the motor starter is mechanically working and communication is established with the automation control system. The
E200 relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Mode Trip state if motor control center enclosure is in a test position, and the E200 relay detects motor current and/or voltage is present.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
IMPORTANT
Motor current is detected when a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Analog Protection
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
The Analog I/O Expansion Modules of the E200 relay scan up to three analog signals per module. This information can be used to trigger an over analog level Trip or Warning.
The analog-based protection features can be used with the following analog applications:
•
Monitoring motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by RTD sensors
•
Monitoring liquid, air, or steam flow
•
Monitoring temperature
•
Monitoring weight
•
Monitoring levels
•
Monitoring a potentiometer
•
Monitoring PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Analog Trip Enable (Parameter 187) and Analog Warning Enable (Parameter 193) are used to enable the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) and Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) are used to monitor the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Analog Trip
The E200 relay trips with an analog module trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
The trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the trip level for a time period greater than the level trip delay.
If the E200 relay trips on an analog module channel, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
137
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Warning
The E200 relay indicates an analog warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 00 Warning Level
When the warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module
The E200 supports as many as 4 analog modules. Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
138
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Name
Analog Module Over Level Trip
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module Over Level Warning
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level
507
516
525
538
547
556
537
546
555
14
20
445
454
463
476
485
494
475
484
493
506
515
524
474
483
492
505
514
523
536
545
554
444
453
462
Parameter Number Description
8
20
Indicate a trip
443
452
461
Define the time period a level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E200 relay trips on a level trip. It is user adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Indicate a warning
Define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E200 relay trips on a warning. It is user adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
139
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Notes:
140
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
6
Commands
This chapter provides detailed information about the reset, clear, and pre-configuration functions of the E200 Electronic Overload Relay. The E200 relay provides three types of commands:
• Trip reset
• Configuration preset
• Clear command
Trip Reset
Trip Reset (Parameter 163) lets you reset an E200 relay when it is in a tripped state.
Trip Reset has the same functionality as pressing the blue reset button on E200 communication module and using the Trip Reset bit in the consumed output assemblies of a communication network.
A trip reset can only be performed when all conditions for the trip event have been cleared. For an overload trip event, the % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) must be below the value that is specified in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174).
Configuration Preset
The E200 relay has a number of preset configurations that let you quickly configure all configuration parameters that are needed for a specific operating mode in one command. This also lets you restore the factory default values for all configuration parameters in the E200 relay.
The following pages list the available configuration presets and the values for the associated pre-configured configuration values.
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
139 TripHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF
140 TripHistoryMaskV
141 TripHistoryMaskP
142 TripHistoryMaskC
143 TripHistoryMaskA
0x003F
0x0FFF
0x27FF
0x0FFF
145 WarnHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF
146 WarnHistoryMaskV 0x003F
147 WarnHistoryMaskP 0x0FFF
148 WarnHistoryMaskC 0x1FFF
Units
Factory Defaults
When the Factory Defaults configuration preset command is selected, the E200 relay restores all configuration parameters back to their original factory default values.
Figure 77 - Factory Default Values
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
304 OutPt00PrFltAct Goto Value
305 OutPt00PrFltVal
306 OutPt00ComFltAct
307 OutPt00ComFltVal
308 OutPt00ComIdlAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
309 OutPt00ComIdlVal
310 OutPt01PrFltAct
311 OutPt01PrFltVal
312 OutPt01ComFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Units No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
428 Screen1Param1 1
429 Screen1Param2
430 Screen2Param1
431 Screen2Param2
432 Screen3Param1
50
2
3
51
433 Screen3Param2
434 Screen4Param1
435 Screen4Param2
436 DisplayTimeout
52
38
39
300
Units
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
141
Chapter 6
Commands
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
149 WarnHistoryMaskA 0x0FFF
171 FLASetting 0.50
172 TripClass
173 OLPTCResetMode
174 OLResetLevel
175 OLWarningLevel
10
Automatic
75
85
176 SingleOrThreePh
177 FLA2Setting
183 TripEnableI
184 TripEnableV
185 TripEnableP
186 TripEnableC
187 TripEnableA
189 WarningEnableI
Three Phase
0.50
0x0003
0
0
0
0
0x20C9
190
191
192
193
195
WarningEnableV
WarningEnableP
WarningEnableC
WarningEnableA
SetOperatingMode
196 InPt00Assignment
197 InPt01Assignment
198 InPt02Assignment
199 InPt03Assignment
200 InPt04Assignment
201 InPt05Assignment
Normal
Normal
202 OutPt0Assignment * Trip Relay
203 OutPt1Assignment Normal
0
0
0
0
Net
Overload
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
204 OutPt2Assignment Normal
205 StartsPerHour 2
206 StartsInterval
207 PMTotalStarts
600
0
208 PMOperatingHours 0
209 ActFLA2wOutput Disable
211 SecurityPolicy
212 Language
213 FeedbackTimeout
0x801F
English
500
214 TransitionDelay
215 InterlockDelay
216 EmergencyStartEn
10000
100
Disable
221 ControlModuleTyp
222 SensingModuleTyp
Ignore
Ignore
223 CommsModuleType Ignore
224 OperStationType
225 DigitalMod1Type
226 DigitalMod2Type
227 DigitalMod3Type
228 DigitalMod4Type
229 AnalogMod1Type
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Units
Amps
%TCU
%TCU
Amps
Seconds
Hrs
331 OutDig2ComFltVal
332 OutDig2ComIdlAct
333 OutDig2ComIdlVal
334 OutDig3PrFltAct
335 OutDig3PrFltVal
336 OutDig3ComFltAct
337 OutDig3ComFltVal
338 OuDig3ComIdlAct
339 OutDig3ComIdlVal
340 OutDig4PrFltAct
341 OutDig4PrFltVal
342 OutDig4ComFltAct
343 OutDig4ComFltVal
344 OutDig4ComIdlAct
345 OutDig4ComIdlVal
346 CommOverride
347 NetworkOverride
350 PtDevOutCOSMask
352 VoltageMode
353 PTPrimary
354 PTSecondary
355 UVInhibitTime
356 UVTripDelay
357 UVTripLevel
358 UVWarningLevel
359 OVInhibitTime
360 OVTripDelay
361 OVTripLevel
362 OVWarningLevel
363 PhRotInhibitTime
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
313 OutPt01ComFltVal
314 OutPt01ComIdlAct
Open
Goto Value
315 OutPt01ComIdlVal
316 OutPt02PrFltAct
317 OutPt02PrFltVal
318 OutPt02ComFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
319 OutPt02ComFltVal
320 OutPt02ComIdlAct
321 OutPt02ComIdlVal
322 OutDig1PrFltAct
323 OutDig1PrFltVal
324 OutDig1ComFltAct
325 OutDig1ComFltVal
326 OutDig1ComIdlAct
327 OutDig1ComIdlVal
328 OutDigp2PrFltAct
329 OutDig2PrFltVal
330 OutDig2ComFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Disable
Disable
0x0000
Delta
480
480
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
10
1.0
100.0
400.0
10
1.0
500.0
490.0
10
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Volt
Volt
Seconds
Seconds
Volt
Volt
Seconds
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
437 InAnMod1Ch00Type Disable
438 InAMod1Ch0Format Eng Units
439 InAMod1C0TmpUnit Degrees C
440 InAMod1C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
441 InAMod1C0OpCktSt Upscale
442 InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
443 InAMod1C0TripDly
444 InAMod1C0TripLvl
1.0
0
445 InAMod1C0WarnLvl 0
446 InAnMod1Ch01Type Disable
447 InAMod1Ch1Format Eng Units
448 InAMod1C1TmpUnit Degrees C
449 InAMod1C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
450 InAMod1C1OpCktSt Upscale
451 InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
452 InAMod1C1TripDly 1.0
453 InAMod1C1TripLvl 0
454 InAMod1C1WarnLvl 0
455 InAnMod1Ch02Type Disable
456 InAMod1Ch2Format Eng Units
457 InAMod1C2TmpUnit Degrees C
458 InAMod1C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
459 InAMod1C2OpCktSt Upscale
460 InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
461 InAMod1C2TripDly 1.0
462 InAMod1C2TripLvl 0
463 InAMod1C2WarnLvl 0
464 OutAnMod1Type
465 OutAnMod1Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
466 OutAnMod1FltActn Zero
467 OutAnMod1IdlActn Zero
468 InAnMod2Ch00Type Disable
469 InAMod2Ch0Format Eng Units
470 InAMod2C0TmpUnit Degrees C
471 InAMod2C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
472 InAMod2C0OpCktSt Upscale
473 InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
474 InAMod2C0TripDly 1.0
475 InAMod2C0TripLvl 0
476 InAMod2C0WarnLvl 0
477 InAnMod2Ch01Type Disable
478 InAMod2Ch1Format Eng Units
479 InAMod2C1TmpUnit Degrees C
480 InAMod2C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
481 InAMod2C1OpCktSt Upscale
482 InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
483 InAMod2C1TripDly
484 InAMod2C1TripLvl
1.0
0
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
142
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Commands
Chapter 6
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
230 AnalogMod2Type
231 AnalogMod3Type
Ignore
Ignore
232 AnalogMod4Type
233 MismatchAction
239 PLInhibitTime
240 PLTripDelay
Ignore
0x0000
0
1
241 GroundFaultType
242 GFInhibitTime
243 GFTripDelay
244 GFTripLevel
245 GFWarningDelay
246 GFWarningLevel
247 GFFilter
248 GFMaxInhibit
Internal
10
0.5
2.50
0
2.00
Disable
Disable
249 StallEnabledTime
250 StallTripLevel
251 JamInhibitTime
252 JamTripDelay
253 JamTripLevel
254 JamWarningLevel
255 ULInhibitTime
256 ULTripDelay
257 ULTripLevel
258 ULWarningLevel
259 CIInhibitTime
260 CITripDelay
261 CITripLevel
262 CIWarningLevel
263 CTPrimary
264 CTSecondary
5
5
35
20
50
70
10
5.0
250
150
10
5.0
10
600
10
5.0
265 UCInhibitTime
266 L1UCTripDelay
267 L1UCTripLevel
268 L1UCWarningLevel
269 L2UCTripDelay
270 L2UCTripLevel
271 L2UCWarningLevel
272 L3UCTripDelay
273 L3UCTripLevel
274 L3UCWarningLevel
275 OCInhibitTime
276 L1OCTripDelay
277 L1OCTripLevel
278 L1OCWarningLevel
279 L2OCTripDelay
280 L2OCTripLevel
281 L2OCWarningLevel
282 L3OCTripDelay
283 L3OCTripLevel
40
1.0
35
40
10
1.0
10
1.0
35
40
1.0
35
100
90
1.0
100
100
90
1.0
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Amps
Seconds
Amps
Seconds
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
%FLA
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
%FLA
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
394 UVARGInhibitTime
395 UVARGTripDelay
396 UVARGTripLevel
397 UVARGWarnLevel
398 OVARGInhibitTime
399 OVARGTripDelay
400 OVARGTripLevel
401 OVARGWarnLevel
402 UVAInhibitTime
403 UVATripDelay
404 UVATripLevel
405 UVAWarningLevel
406 OVAInhibitTime
407 OVATripDelay
408 OVATripLevel
409 OVAWarningLevel
410 UPFLagInhibTime
411 UPFLagTripDelay
412 UPFLagTripLevel
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
364 PhaseRotTripType
365 VIBInhibitTime
ABC
10
366 VIBTripDelay
367 VIBTripLevel
368 VIBWarningLevel
369 UFInhibitTime
1.0
15
10
10
370 UFTripDelay
371 UFTripLevel
372 UFWarningLevel
373 OFInhibitTime
374 OFTripDelay
375 OFTripLevel
376 OFWarningLevel
377 PowerScale
1.0
63
62 kW
58
10
1.0
57
378 UWInhibitTime
379 UWTripDelay
380 UWTripLevel
381 UWWarningLevel
382 OWInhibitTime
383 OWTripDelay
384 OWTripLevel
385 OWWarningLevel
386 UVARCInhibitTime
387 UVARCTripDelay
388 UVARCTripLevel
389 UVARCWarnLevel
390 OVARCInhibitTime
391 OVARCTripDelay
392 OVARCTripLevel
393 OVARCWarnLevel
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
-90
Units
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Hz
Hz
Seconds
Seconds
Hz
Hz
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVA kVA
Seconds
Seconds kVA kVA
Seconds
Seconds
%
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kW kW
Seconds
Seconds kW kW
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
485 InAMod2C1WarnLvl 0
486 InAnMod2Ch02Type Disable
487 InAMod2Ch2Format Eng Units
488 InAMod2C2TmpUnit Degrees C
489 InAMod2C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
490 InAMod2C2OpCktSt Upscale
491 InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
492 InAMod2C2TripDly 1.0
493 InAMod2C2TripLvl 0
494 InAMod2C2WarnLvl 0
495 OutAnMod2Type
496 OutAnMod2Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
497 OutAnMod2FltActn Zero
498 OutAnMod2dlActn Zero
499 InAnMod3Ch00Type Disable
500 InAMod3Ch0Format Eng Units
501 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
502 InAMod3C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
503 InAMod3C0OpCktSt Upscale
504 InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
505 InAMod3C0TripDly
506 InAMod3C0TripLvl
1.0
0
507 InAMod3C0WarnLvl 0
508 InAnMod3Ch01Type Disable
509 InAMod3Ch1Format Eng Units
510 InAMod3C1TmpUnit Degrees C
511 InAMod3C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
512 InAMod3C1OpCktSt Upscale
513 InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
514 InAMod3C1TripDly 1.0
515 InAMod3C1TripLvl 0
516 InAMod3C1WarnLvl 0
517 InAnMod3Ch02Type Disable
518 InAMod3Ch2Format Eng Units
519 InAMod3C2TmpUnit Degrees C
520 InAMod3C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
521 InAMod3C2OpCktSt Upscale
522 InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
523 InAMod3C2TripDly 1.0
524 InAMod3C2TripLvl 0
525 InAMod3C2WarnLvl 0
526 OutAnMod3Type Disable
527 OutAnMod3Select Ave %FLA
528 OutAnMod3FltActn Zero
529 OutAnMod3dlActn Zero
530 InAnMod4Ch00Type Disable
531 InAMod4Ch0Format Eng Units
532 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
533 InAMod4C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
143
Chapter 6
Commands
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
284 L3OCWarningLevel
285 LineLossInhTime
90
10
286 L1LossTripDelay
287 L2LossTripDelay
288 L3LossTripDelay
291 Datalink0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0
292 Datalink1
293 Datalink2
294 Datalink3
295 Datalink4
296 Datalink5
297 Datalink6
298 Datalink7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Units
%
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
413 UPFLagWarnLevel
414 OPFLagInhibTime
-95
10
415 OPFLagTripDelay
416 OPFLagTripLevel
417 OPFLagWarnLevel
418 UPFLeadInhibTime
1.0
-95
-90
10
419 UPFLeadTripDelay
420 UPFLeadTripLevel
421 UPFLeadWarnLevel 95
422 OPFLeadInhibTime 10
1.0
90
423 OPFLeadTripDelay
424 OPFLeadTripLevel
425 OPFLeadWarnLevel 90
426 DemandPeriod 15
427 NumberOfPeriods
1.0
95
1
Units
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Min
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
534 InAMod4C0OpCktSt Upscale
535 InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
536 InAMod4C0TripDly
537 InAMod4C0TripLvl
1.0
0
538 InAMod4C0WarnLvl 0
539 InAnMod4Ch01Type Disable
540 InAMod4Ch1Format Eng Units
541 InAMod4C1TmpUnit Degrees C
542 InAMod4C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
543 InAMod4C1OpCktSt Upscale
544 InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
545 InAMod4C1TripDly 1.0
546 InAMod4C1TripLvl 0
547 InAMod4C1WarnLvl 0
548 InAnMod4Ch02Type Disable
549 InAMod4Ch2Format Eng Units
550 InAMod4C2TmpUnit Degrees C
551 InAMod4C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
552 InAMod4C2OpCktSt Upscale
553 InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
554 InAMod4C2TripDly
555 InAMod4C2TripLvl
1.0
0
556 InAMod4C2WarnLvl 0
557 OutAnMod4Type Disable
558 OutAnMod4Select Ave %FLA
559 OutAnMod4FltActn Zero
560 OutAnMod4dlActn
561 FnlFltValStDur
562 OutPt00FnlFltVal
563 OutPt01FnlFltVal
Zero
Zero
Open
Open
564 OutPt02FnlFltVal
565 OutDig1FnlFltVal
566 OutDig2FnlFltVal
567 OutDig3FnlFltVal
568 OutDig4FnlFltVal
569 NetStrtComFltAct
570 NetStrtComFltVal
571 NetStrtComIdlAct
572 NetStrtComIdlVal
573 NetStrtFnlFltVal
574 VoltageScale
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Open
Volts
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
144
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Commands
Chapter 6
Clear Command
Function Name
Clear Operating Statistics
Clear History Logs
Clear % TCU
Clear kWh
Clear kVARh
Clear kVAh
Clear Max. kW Demand
Clear Max kVAR Demand
Clear Max kVA Demand
Clear Command (Parameter 165) lets you clear historical logs, operating statistics, and energy data within the nonvolatile memory of the E200 relay.
Table 28 - Clear Command Functions
Parameter Name
Operating Time
Starts Counter
Trip History 0
Trip History 1
Trip History 2
Trip History 3
Trip History 4
Warning History 0
Warning History 1
Warning History 2
Warning History 3
Warning History 4
Thermal Capacity Utilized kWh x 10
9 kWh x 10
6 kWh x 10
3 kWh x 10
0 kWh x 10
-3 kVARh Consumed x 10
9 kVARh Consumed x 10
6 kVARh Consumed x 10
3 kVARh Consumed x 10
0 kVARh Consumed x 10
-3 kVARh Generated x 10
9 kVARh Generated x 10
6 kVARh Generated x 10
3 kVARh Generated x 10
0 kVARh Generated x 10
-3 kVARh Net x 10
9 kVARh Net x 10
6 kVARh Net x 10
3 kVARh Net x 10
0 kVARh Net x 10
-3 kVAh x 10
9 kVAh x 10
6 kVAh x 10
3 kVAh x 10
0 kVAh x 10
-3
Max kW Demand
Max kVAR Demand
Max kVA Demand
98
99
100
101
96
97
94
95
92
93
90
91
88
89
86
87
84
85
82
83
136
1
80
81
Parameter No. Description
28
29 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
127
128
129
130
131 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
132
133
134
135 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
102
103
104
106
108
110 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
145
Chapter 6
Commands
Function Name
Clear All
Parameter Name
% Thermal Capacity Utilized
Operating Time
Starts Counter kWh x 10
9 kWh x 10
6 kWh x 10
3 kWh x 10
0 kWh x 10
-3 kVARh Consumed x 10
9 kVARh Consumed x 10
6 kVARh Consumed x 10
3 kVARh Consumed x 10
0 kVARh Consumed x 10
-3 kVARh Generated x 10
9 kVARh Generated x 10
6 kVARh Generated x 10
3 kVARh Generated x 10
0 kVARh Generated x 10
-3 kVARh Net x 10
9 kVARh Net x 10
6 kVARh Net x 10
3 kVARh Net x 10
0 kVARh Net x 10
-3 kVAh x 10
9 kVAh x 10
6 kVAh x 10
3 kVAh x 10
0 kVAh x 10
-3
Max kW Demand
Max kVAR Demand
Max kVA Demand
Trip History 0
Trip History 1
Trip History 2
Trip History 3
Trip History 4
Warning History 0
Warning History 1
Warning History 2
Warning History 3
Warning History 4
129
130
131
132
108
110
127
128
133
134
135
136
102
103
104
106
98
99
100
101
96
97
94
95
92
93
90
91
Parameter No. Description
1
80
81
28
29
88
89
86
87
84
85
82
83 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
146
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
7
Metering and Diagnostics
This chapter provides detailed information about the metering and diagnostic information that the E200 Electronic Overload Relay generates. The metering and diagnostic functions are organized into seven sections:
• Device Monitor
• Current Monitor
• Voltage Monitor
• Power Monitor
• Energy Monitor
• Trip/Warning History
• Trip Snapshot
Device Monitor
The E200 relay's device monitor diagnostics provides information on the status of the device, which includes:
• Thermal overload protection
• Trip and warning protection functions
• Digital inputs and relay outputs
• Operator station
• Hardware options
• Time and date
Table 29 - Device Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
(%TCU)
Time to Trip
Time To Reset
Current Trip Status
Voltage Trip Status
Power Trip Status
Control Trip Status
Current Warning Status
Voltage Warning Status
Power Warning Status
Control Warning Status
Input Status 0
12
13
10
11
16
6
7
4
5
Parameter No. Description
1
2
• reports the calculated percent thermal capacity utilization of the motor that is being monitored
• when the percent thermal capacity utilization equals 100%, the E200 relay issues an overload trip
• overload Time to Trip indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs when the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E200 relay
• when the measured current is below the trip rating, the value is reported as 9,999 seconds
3
• reports the time remaining until the device can be reset after an overload trip
• when the %TCU value falls to or below the Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset
• after an overload trip is reset, the value is reported as 0 seconds
• reports the status of the current-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the power-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the current-based protective warning functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
• reports the state of the digital inputs on the E200 relay Control Module
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
147
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Parameter Name
Input Status 1
Output Status
Operator Station Status
Device Status 0
Device Status 1
Firmware Revision Number
Control Module ID
Sensing Module ID
Operator Station ID
Expansion Digital Module ID
Expansion Analog Module ID
Operating Time
Starts Counter
Starts Available
Time to Start
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Invalid Configuration Parameter
Invalid Configuration Cause
Mismatch Status
Parameter No. Description
17 • reports the state of the digital inputs on the E200 relay Digital Expansion Modules
18
19
• reports the state of the relay outputs on the E200 relay Control Module and Digital Expansion Modules
• reports the state of the E200 relay Operator Station input buttons and output LEDs
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
• reports the general status of the E200 relay and the sensing capabilities that are present
• Device Status 0 bit 14, "Ready", is cleared under the following circumstances:
– Device Status 0 bit 0, "Trip Present", is set
– The E200 relay has not completed its power-up initialization
– The processing of data in a configuration assembly is in progress
– A CopyCat function is in progress
– A Factory Defaults command has been invoked and is in progress.
• reports the specific features of the E200 relay Control and Sensing Modules
• reports which Expansion Digital Modules or Analog Modules are present on the E200 relay Expansion Bus
• reports the firmware revision number of the E200 relay system
• identifies which specific Control Module is present in the E200 relay system
• identifies which specific Sensing Module is present in the E200 relay system
• identifies which specific Operator Station is present on the Expansion Bus of the E200 relay system
• identifies which specific Expansion Digital Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E200 relay system
• identifies which specific Expansion Analog Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E200 relay system
• represents the number of hours that a motor has been running
• you can reset this value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function Clear Operating Statistics
• represents the number of times a motor has been started
• you can reset this value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function Clear Operating Statistics
• reports the number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
• reports the amount of time remaining until a new start can be issued
• if the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs
• reports the year in the virtual real-time clock of the E200 relay
• reports the month in the virtual real-time clock of the E200 relay
• reports the day in the virtual real-time clock of the E200 relay
• reports the hour in the virtual real-time clock of the E200 relay
• reports the minute in the virtual real-time clock of the E200 relay
• reports the second in the virtual real-time clock of the E200 relay
• reports the parameter number that is causing a configuration trip in the E200 relay
• see
Chapter 3 for more information about a configuration fault
• reports the reason for the configuration trip in the E200 relay
• see Chapter 3 for more information about a configuration fault
• reports the module that is causing a mismatch trip or warning in the E200 relay
• see Chapter 3 for more information about a mismatch fault
Current Monitor
The E200 relay current monitor diagnostics provides information on the current consumed by the load that the E200 relay is monitoring, and it provides diagnostics for a three-phase current system including imbalance and ground fault current.
Table 30 - Current Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
L1 Current
L2 Current
L3 Current
43
44
45
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L1 and T1 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L2 and T2 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module
Average Current 46
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L3 and T3 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the average current of the monitored current
• When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to three-phase, average current is calculated as follows:
– Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current + L3 Current) / 3
• When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to single phase, average current is calculated as follows:
– Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current) / 2
L1 Percent FLA 47
• reports the L1 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L1 Percent FLA = L1 Current / Full Load Amp
148
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
L2 Percent FLA 48
• reports the L2 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L2 Percent FLA = L2 Current / Full Load Amps
L3 Percent FLA
Average Percent FLA
49
50
• reports the L3 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L3 Percent FLA = L3 Current / Full Load Amps
• reports the average current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2 (Parameter
177)
– Average Percent FLA = Average Current / Full Load Amps
Ground Fault Current
Current Imbalance
51
52
• reports the ground fault current measured by the internal core balanced current transformer of the E200 relay Sensing Module or external core balanced current transformer
• reports the percentage of uneven current consumption in the monitored power system
• Current Imbalance is defined by the following equation
– Current Imbalance = 100% * ( where
I
d
I
d
/
I
a
)
I
a
= Average Current
Voltage Monitor
The voltage monitor diagnostics of the E200 relay provide information on the voltage being supplied to the load. The voltage diagnostics include three-phase voltage, phase imbalance, phase rotation, and frequency.
Table 31 - Voltage Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
L1-L2 Voltage
L2-L3 Voltage
L3-L1 Voltage
53
54
55
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module
Average L-L Voltage 56
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the average voltage of the monitored L-L voltages
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Average L-L Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage + L3-L1 Voltage) / 3
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Average L-L Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage) / 2
L1-N Voltage
L2-N Voltage
L3-N Voltage
Average L-N Voltage
57
58
59
60
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 power terminal of the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 power terminal of the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 power terminal of the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the average voltage of the monitored L-N voltages
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Average L-N Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage + L3-N Voltage) / 3
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Average L-N Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage) / 2
Voltage Imbalance
Frequency
Phase Rotation
61
62
63
• reports the percentage of uneven voltage being supplied by the monitored power system
• Voltage Imbalance is defined by the following equation:
– Voltage Imbalance = 100% * (V
Voltage d
/V a
); where V d
= Maximum L-L Voltage Deviation from the Average L-L Voltage, V a
= Average L-L
• reports the voltage frequency in Hertz of the monitored power system from the E200 relay Sensing Module
• reports the voltage phase rotation as ABC or ACB of the monitored power system from the E200 relay Sensing Module.
Power Monitor
The power monitor diagnostics of the E200 relay provide information on the power being supplied to the load. The power diagnostics include real power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
149
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Table 32 - Power Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
Power Scale 377
• allows the E200 relay to display the values of Parameters 64…75 as Kilowatts or Megawatts
– generally used for large medium voltage-based power systems,
L1 Real Power 64
• reports the real power for line 1 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Real Power is set to 0
L2 Real Power
L3 Real Power
Total Real Power
L1 Reactive Power
65
66
67
68
• reports the real power for line 2 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Real Power is set to 0
• reports the real power for line 3 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Real Power is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 Real Power is set to 0
• reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Real Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power + L3 Real Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Real Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power)
• reports the reactive power for line 1 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Reactive Power is set to 0
L2 Reactive Power
L3 Reactive Power
Total Reactive Power
L1 Apparent Power
L2 Apparent Power
L3 Apparent Power
Total Apparent Power
L1 Power Factor
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
• reports the reactive power for line 2 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Reactive Power is set to 0
• reports the reactive power for line 3 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Reactive Power is set to 0.
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 Reactive Power is set to 0
• reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Reactive Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power + L3 Reactive Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Reactive Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power)
• reports the apparent power for line 1 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Apparent Power is set to 0
• reports the apparent power for line 2 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Apparent Power is set to 0
• reports the apparent power for line 3 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Apparent Power is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 Apparent Power is set to 0
• reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Apparent Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power + L3 Apparent Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Apparent Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power)
• reports the power factor for line 1 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Power Factor is set to 0
150
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
L2 Power Factor Power 77
• reports the power factor for line 2 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Power Factor is set to 0
L3 Power Factor 78
• reports the power factor for line 3 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Power Factor is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 power factor is set to 0
Total Power Factor 79
• reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Power Factor is calculated as follows:
• Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor + L3 Power Factor) / 3
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Power Factor is calculated as follows:
– Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor) / 2
Energy Monitor
The energy monitor diagnostics of the E200 relay provide information on the electrical energy the load is consuming. The energy diagnostics include kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW
Demand, kVAR Demand, and kVA Demand.
Table 33 - Power Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
kWh 10
9
80
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kWh kWh 10 kWh 10
6
3
81
82
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents 000,XXX,000,000.000 kWh
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kWh kWh 10 kWh 10
0
-3 kVARh Consumed 10 kVARh Consumed 10
9
6
83
84
85
86
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kWh
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kWh
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVARh kVARh Consumed 10 kVARh Consumed 10 kVARh Consumed 10 kVARh Generated 10 kVARh Generated 10 kVARh Generated 10
9
6
3
3
0
-3
87
88
89
90
91
92
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVARh
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
151
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Parameter Name Parameter No. Description
kVARh Generated 10
0
93
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVARh kVARh Generated 10 kVARh Net 10
9
-3
94
95
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVARh kVARh Net 10 kVARh Net 10 kVARh Net 10 kVARh Net 10
6
3
0
-3
96
97
98
99
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVARh kVAh 10 kVAh 10 kVAh 10 kVAh 10 kVAh 10
9
6
3
0
-3 kW Demand
Max. kW Demand kVAR Demand
Max kVAR Demand kVA Demand
Max kVA Demand
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVAh
• reports the average real energy usage in kW over a defined period
• reports the maximum kW Demand since the last Max kW Demand Reset command
• reports the average reactive energy usage in kVAR over a defined period
• reports the maximum kVAR Demand since the last Max kVAR Demand Reset command
• reports the average reactive energy usage in kVA over a defined period
• reports the maximum kVA Demand since the last Max kVA Demand Reset command
Analog Monitor
The Analog I/O Expansion Modules of the E200 relay scan up to three analog signals per module. This information can be used to monitor the following analog applications:
• Motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by RTD sensors
• Liquid, air, or steam flow
• Temperature
• Weight
• Vessel level
• Potentiometer
• PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
152
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Trip / Warning History
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
Table 34 - Analog Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 1 Status
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02)
Analog Module 2 Status
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 3 Status
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 4 Status
125
120
121
122
126
124
117
118
119
Parameter No. Description
111 • reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00
112
113
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02
123
114
115
116
• reports the status of Analog Module 1
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02
• reports the status of Analog Module 2
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02
• reports the status of Analog Module 3
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02
• reports the status of Analog Module 4
The E200 relay provides a trip and warning history in which the last five trips and last five warnings are recorded into nonvolatile storage. A mask is available to limit which trip and warning events are logged to the history’s memory.
Trip History Codes
When the E200 relay issues a trip, the reason for the trip is recorded into the Trip
History.
Table 35 lists the codes that are available for the trip history records.
Table 35 - Trip History Codes
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
16
17
14
15
4
5
2
3
Trip History Code
0
1
Description
No Fault Conditions Detected
Motor current overload condition
Phase current Loss is detected in one of the motor phases
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor has not reached full speed by the end of Stall Enable Time
Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam trip level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
153
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
154
51
52
49
50
43
44
41
42
39
40
37
38
35
36
33
34
31
32
29
30
27
28
25
26
21
22
19
20
Trip History Code
18
70
71
68
69
65
66
67
74
75
72
73
59
60
61
62
63
64
55
58
53
54
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Description
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below trip level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded trip level
Sensing Module boot loader failed to load firmware
Sensing Module output enable open
Sensing Module missing interrupts
Sensing Module not calibrated
Sensing Module frame type failure
Sensing Module flash configuration failure
Sensing Module detected an overrun error
Sensing Module is not responding
Total Real Power (kW) is below trip level
Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded trip level
Under Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Under Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Over Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) is below trip level
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) exceeded trip level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Test trip caused by holding the Test/Reset button for 2 seconds
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined trip was generated
The Stop button the Operator Station was pressed
Remote trip command detected
Maximum starts per hour exceeded
Hardware configuration fault. Check for shorts on input terminal
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
Control Module CAN0 initialization failure
Control Module CAN0 bus failure
Control Module CAN1 initialization failure
Control Module CAN1 bus failure
Control Module ADC0 failure
Control Module detected too many CRC errors
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
97
98
95
96
93
94
91
92
88
90
86
87
84
85
82
83
79
81
77
78
Trip History Code
76
Description
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
External NVS Chip has detected communication timeout error
External NVS Chip has detected a CRC error
External NVS Chip has detected data out of range
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
Test Mode is engaged and current/voltage was detected
Heap memory could not be allocated
Vendor ID hardware fault
Parameter Name
Trip History 0
Trip History 1
Trip History 2
Trip History 3
Trip History 4
Trip History Mask
Current Trip History Mask
Voltage Trip History Mask
Power Trip History Mask
Control Trip History Mask
Analog Trip History Mask
Trip History Parameters
Table 36 - Trip History Parameters
Parameter No. Description
127
128
• reports the most recent trip event
• reports the second most recent trip event
129
130
• reports the third most recent trip event
• reports the fourth most recent trip event
131 • reports the fifth most recent trip event
You can decide which trip events are recorded into the E200 relay trip history by using the Trip History Masks
139
140
141
142
143
• lets you select which current-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• lets you select which voltage-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• lets you select which power-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• lets you select which control-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• lets you select which analog-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
Warning History
When the E200 relay issues a warning, the reason for the warning is recorded into the
Warning History. Table 37 lists the codes that are available for the warning history
records.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
155
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
156
Table 37 - Warning History Codes
70
71
68
69
72
73
65
66
67
50
51
56
58
60
61
39
40
41
42
43
44
37
38
35
36
33
34
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
1
3
Warning History Code Description
0 No Warning Conditions Detected
Approaching a motor current overload condition
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam warning level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1 Current was below L1 Undercurrent Warning Level
L2 Current was below L2 Undercurrent Warning Level
L3 Current was below L3 Undercurrent Warning Level
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Warning Level
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Warning Level
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Warning Level
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below the warning level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded warning level
Total Real Power (kW) is below warning level
Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded warning level
Under Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Under Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Over Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (kVA) is below warning level
Total Apparent Power (kVA) exceeded warning level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined warning was generated
Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
Number of Starts Warning Level Exceeded
Operating Hours Warning Level Exceeded
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
90
91
87
88
85
86
83
84
94
95
92
93
98
81
82
75
76
Warning History Code Description
74 Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
A hardware fault condition was detected
Parameter Name
Warning History 0
Warning History 1
Warning History 2
Warning History 3
Warning History 4
Warning History Mask
Current Warning History Mask
Voltage Warning History Mask
Power Warning History Mask
Control Warning History Mask
Analog Warning History Mask
Warning History Parameters
Table 38 - Warning History Parameters
Parameter No. Description
133 • reports the most recent warning event
134
135
• reports the second most recent warning event
• reports the third most recent warning event
136
137
• reports the fourth most recent warning event
• reports the fifth most recent warning event
You can decide which warning events are recorded into the E200 relay warning history by using the Warning History Masks
145 • lets you select which current-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
146
147
148
149
• lets you select which voltage-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
• lets you select which power-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
• lets you select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
• lets you select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
Trip Snapshot
The trip snapshot populates the seven parameters within it, to offer some insight into the reason for the trip. This information is available until the unit trips/is tripped again, at which time it is overwritten. This includes doing a test trip.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
157
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Table 39 - Trip Snapshot Parameters
Parameter Name
Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage
Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage
Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage
Trip Snapshot Total Real Power
Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power
Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power
Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor
Parameter No. Description
156
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event
157
158
159
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E200 relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW at the time of the most recent trip event
160
161
162
• reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage at the time of the most recent trip event
158
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
8
DeviceLogix Functionality
The E200 Electronic Overload Relay supports DeviceLogix functionality, which is a logic engine that resides within the E200 relay. You can select one of the preprogrammed DeviceLogix programs (see
) embedded in the E200 relay, or you can create a custom program in function block or ladder logic.
Access the DeviceLogix interface via the Connected Components Workbench software.
IMPORTANT
A DeviceLogix program only runs if the logic has been enabled, which can be done with Connected Component Workbench software.
Output Relay Overrides
Parameter Name
Communication Fault & Idle
Override
Network Fault Override
Use DeviceLogix functionality to provide specific output relay performance under specific communication or network conditions. Use the following parameters to allow a DeviceLogix program to override the E200 output relay configuration states controlled by the Communication Fault Modes and Communication Idle Modes (see
Output Relay Configuration States on page 34
).
Table 40 - Output Relay Override Parameters
Parameter No. Description
346
347
• defines whether or not DeviceLogix functionality controls the E200 output relays when either a communication fault
(missing I/O connection) or communication idle (network scanner or programmable logic controller is not in Run mode) condition exists
– If DeviceLogix functionality is enabled but Communication Fault & Idle Override is disabled, the operation of the E200 output relays is controlled by the Communication Fault Mode and Communication Idle Mode parameters if a communication fault or communication idle condition occurs.
– If DeviceLogix functionality and Communication Fault & Idle Override are both enabled, the E200 outputs relays are controlled by the DeviceLogix program regardless of the Communication Fault Mode or Communication Idle Mode.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is not enabled, the E200 output relays are controlled by the Communication Fault Mode or
Communication Idle Mode parameters if a communication fault or communication idle condition occurs – regardless of the override configuration of the Communication Fault & Idle Override parameter.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is transitioned from enable to disable, the E200 output relays immediately go to the appropriate Communication Fault Mode or Communication Idle Mode.
• defines whether or not DeviceLogix functionality controls the E200 output relays when either a duplicate node address is detected or a network bus off condition exists
– If DeviceLogix functionality is enabled but Network Fault is disabled, the operation of the E200 output relays is controlled by the Communication Fault Mode parameters if a network fault condition occurs.
– If DeviceLogix functionality and Network Fault are both enabled, the E200 outputs relays are controlled by the
DeviceLogix program regardless of the Communication Fault Mode.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is not enabled, the E200 output relays are controlled by the Communication Fault Mode parameters if a network fault condition occurs – regardless of the Network Fault Override configuration.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is transitioned from enable to disable, the E200 output relays immediately go to the appropriate Communication Fault Mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
159
Chapter 8
DeviceLogix Functionality
DeviceLogix Programming
DeviceLogix functionality has many applications and the implementation is only limited to the imagination of the programmer. Remember that the application of
DeviceLogix functionality is only designed to handle simple logic routines. Program
DeviceLogix functionality by using simple Boolean math operators (such as AND,
OR, NOT), timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is made by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the E200 digital inputs and output relays. There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the most common are listed below:
• Increased system reliability
• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
• Operation independent of PLC or Network status
• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
• Critical operations can be safely shut down through local logic
See publication RA-UM003 for more information about the capabilities of
DeviceLogix functionality and how to use the DeviceLogix program editor
(1)
160
(1) DeviceLogix programs have a maximum limit of 100 instructions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
9
Connected Components Workbench Software
Configuration
Device Commissioning
This chapter provides the necessary instructions to connect to the E200 Electronic
Overload Relay Parameter Configuration Module (PCM) via Universal Serial Bus
(USB). The following recommendations are intended to deliver smooth startup and operation.
• Ensure a valid copy of RSLinx Classic is installed on the target computer.
• Download and install the latest version EDS file that supports the E200
Parameter Configuration Module. See
for more information.
• Ensure that you have installed Connected Component Workbench software version 11 or newer on the target computer.
Before you can set up a connection, you need to configure the PCM. Figure 78
shows
the location of the hardware adjustment switches and dials. Table 41
describes the adjustment dial position settings, and
describes the DIP switch adjustment settings.
Figure 78 - PCM Hardware Switches
Adjustment Dials
)
DIP Switch
Position 1 = Closed
DIP Switch
Position 0 = Open
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
161
Chapter 9
Connected Components Workbench Software Configuration
Description
Parameter Name
Trip Class 10
Trip Class 20
Trip Class 30
USB or 193-EOS-SDS Configuration
Table 41 - Adjustment Dial Position Settings
Parameter/Value
USB or 193-EOS-SDS Configuration (DIP must be set to 00000000)
FLA xx.x
0.5…30 A Sensing Module
FLA xxx 6…60 A Sensing Module
10…100 A Sensing Module
FLA xxx
20…200 A Sensing Module
Administration Mode (DIP must be set to 00000000)
Restore Factory Defaults (DIP must be set to 00000000)
2
7
1
0
8
6
0
3
0
Dial Position Adjustment Settings
Current Setting
X100 X10 X1
[A]
0
0 0
0 0
5
—
0.5 min.
0
6
0
1
0
0
0
0
30 max.
6 min.
60 max.
10 min.
0
7
0
2
8
0
7
0
0
8
100 max.
20 min.
200 max.
—
—
1
0
0
1
1
Table 42 - DIP Switch Adjustment Settings
Trip Class
2
DIP Switch Position Adjustment Settings
3
Automatic
Reset
4
Phase Loss
5
Ground Fault
(Internal 2.0 A)
6
Jam
(400% FLA)
1
0
1
0
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
0
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
0
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
0
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
0
7
Underload
(50% FLA)
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
0
8
Undervoltage
(350V)
1 = Enable
0 = Disable
0
Establish the Connection to
Connected Components
Workbench Software
Follow these additional steps to interface with the E200 using the Connected
Components Workbench software.
162
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Connected Components Workbench Software Configuration
Chapter 9
1. Launch the software, then select either “New” project or “Discover” to add the connected E200 module to an active project.
2. Using the “Discover” method will bring up an RSLinx Connection Browser interface. Select the “USB” communication path and browse to the target E200 module. Note: If the E200 relay is not present under the USB communication path, you can also access it via the virtual backplane “AB-VBP” communication path.
3. The main screen now displays the E200 relay interface. Select “Add To Project”
if you have not already done this in step 1
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
163
Chapter 9
Connected Components Workbench Software Configuration
4. The E200 device is now shown under the corresponding main project tree.
Right click to copy, delete, or rename the device.
5. By default, the active E200 device displays the "Overview" interface from the left-hand menu. This menu shows basic device level information, including firmware revision number.
6. Navigate to the "Parameters" section to display the corresponding device parameters.
7. The “Faults/Alarms” section displays any active and previous device faults.
164
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Connected Components Workbench Software Configuration
Chapter 9
8. The “Device Info” section shows much more detailed information about the
E200 device manufacturing details and all sub-component firmware versions that are presently installed.
9. You can modify the time and date programmed to the device by selecting the appropriate option from the device menu.
DeviceLogix Interface in
Connected Components
Workbench Software
Access the DeviceLogix interface from Connected Components Workbench software.
Enable or disable the DeviceLogix program by selecting “DeviceLogix” from the lefthand menu.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
165
Chapter 9
Connected Components Workbench Software Configuration
The “Launch Editor” selection launches the corresponding E200 DeviceLogix editor.
Edit the corresponding properties of the DeviceLogix program for enhanced identification.
Commissioning the
Protection Functions
For additional details specific to DeviceLogix functionality, see Chapter 8
.
This section describes how to use the Connected Components Workbench software to configure the function settings of the E200 Overload Relay.
The product should now be configured and communicating via the USB interface.
The last step is to program the overload setup parameters 171…177 according to the desired application requirements. Use the Connected Components Workbench software or the E300/E200 Diagnostic Station (see
) to program the device.
You can view the E200 parameters in either a complete linear list or grouped by function.
Another useful feature within this particular interface is the option “Show Non-
Defaults”. This displays only those parameters that have been modified from their
166
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Connected Components Workbench Software Configuration
Chapter 9
default setting. This display also highlights parameters that you have changed. To revert to the full list view, select “Show All”.
To change a parameter that allows modification, select the “Value” field of the desired parameter and edit this field based on the motor overload application.
Note: parameters that have units are displayed in the “Units” column. Default, minimum, and maximum parameter values are displayed in separate columns.
After you have programmed all necessary parameters for the target motor overload application, select “Upload” from the top right-hand “Connect” option.This command commits the settings to the target device.
See
for information about the complete parameter spreadsheet that is attached to this PDF, which contains a description of each programmable parameter and its intended function.
For additional details about the Connected Component Workbench software, refer to
Connected Components Workbench Software Quick Tips, publication 9328-SP002
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
167
Chapter 9
Connected Components Workbench Software Configuration
Notes:
168
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Chapter
10
Firmware and EDS Files
This chapter provides detailed information about firmware compatibility among the
E200 Electronic Overload Relay modules and provides instructions on how to update firmware for an E200 relay module.
Firmware Compatibility
The sensing, control, and communication modules of an E200 relay have their own firmware for the functionality of the module and its subsystems. Update each module and its associated subsystems by using the ControlFLASH or ControlFLASH Plus utilities, which are the same utilities that are used to download firmware into a Logixbased controller. The ControlFLASH/ControlFLASH Plus kits use one command to update all E200 relay modules and subsystems for that specific system release. Consult the Product Compatibility and Download Center to find the most current firmware revision.
Updating Firmware
Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product release notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http:/
/www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/pcdc.page
.
After you have downloaded and installed the firmware, run the ControlFLASH/
ControlFLASH Plus application by selecting ControlFLASH from the Microsoft®
Windows® Start menu.
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
File Installation
Before the E200 relay Parameter Configuration Module is configured to communicate via Universal Serial Bus (USB), it must be registered to the software that configures the network (for example, Rockwell Automation RSLinx Classic and Connected
Components Workbench software). Register the module by installing an EDS file.
You need the EDS file for the E200 relay Parameter Configuration Module. Get the
EDS files from Allen-Bradley EDS file download website.
Download the EDS File
Download the EDS file for the E200 relay Parameter Configuration Module from the
Allen-Bradley EDS File download site. Using a web browser on the personal computer that is connected to the internet, download the EDS file by following these steps:
1. Type http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/ networks/eds.page? on the address line of the web browser.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
169
Chapter 10
Firmware and EDS Files
2. Enter 193-ECM-PCM for the Bulletin Number, and click Search.
3. Locate the EDS file for the E200 relay Parameter Configuration Module and download it to the personal computer.
Install the EDS File
Using RSLinx Classic, install the E200 relay Parameter Configuration Module's EDS file from the RSLinx Classic RSWho screen using these steps.
1. Start the EDS Hardware Installation Tool located at Start>Programs>Rockwell
Software>RSLinx Tools and Add a new device
170
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Firmware and EDS Files
Chapter 10
2. Use the EDS Wizard to install the downloaded E200 relay Parameter
Configuration ModuleEDS file.
3. When you are finished, RSLinx Classic recognizes the newly registered E200 relay Parameter Configuration Module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
171
Chapter 10
Firmware and EDS Files
Notes:
172
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Status Indicators
Chapter
11
Troubleshooting
This chapter helps you troubleshoot the E200 Electronic Overload Relay by using the advisory LEDs and diagnostic parameters.
ATTENTION:
Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous. Electrical shock, burns, or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury. For safety of maintenance personnel and others who may be exposed to electrical hazards associated with the maintenance activities, follow the local safetyrelated work practices (for example, the NFPA 70E, Part II, Electrical Safety for Employee Workplaces, in the United States) when working on or near energized equipment. Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments. Do not work alone on energized equipment.
ATTENTION:
Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits. The cause of a fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation. Failure to correct a control system or mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation.
All E200 relay Parameter Configuration Modules and Operator Stations have two diagnostic status indicators: Power LED and Trip/Warn LED. Use these diagnostic status indicators to help identify the state of the E200 relay and the reason for the trip or warning event.
Power
The E200 relay Power LED identifies the state of the E200 relay system.
Table 43 - Power LED for Parameter Configuration Module
Blinking Green
Solid Green
Solid Red
Blinking Red
(1)
Blinking Green/Red
Device Ready/ Ready Mode
Device Active (Current Detected) / Run Mode
Device Error
Communication Error
CopyCat in Progress
(1) Available on Operator Station.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
173
Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
174
Trip/Warn
The E200 relay Power LED identifies the reason for the trip or warning event. The
E200 relay displays a long and short blinking pattern to identify the reason for the trip or warning event.
Table 44 - Trip / Warn LED for Parameter Configuration Module
Blinking Red
Blinking Yellow
Trip Event
Warning Event
lists the blink patterns for the E200 relay trip and warning events.
Table 45 - Blink Patterns for Trip/Warn Events
Current
Voltage
Power
Code
Overload
Phase Loss
Ground Fault Current
Stall
Jam
Underload
Current Imbalance
L1 Under Current
L2 Under Current
L3 Under Current
L1 Over Current
L2 Over Current
L3 Over Current
L1 Line Loss
L2 Line Loss
L3 Line Loss
Under Voltage
Over Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Phase Rotation Mismatch
Under Frequency
Over Frequency
Under kW
Over kW
Under kVAR Consumed
Over kVAR Consumed
Under kVAR Generated
Over kVAR Generated
Under kVA
Over kVA
Under PF Lagging
Over PF Lagging
Under PF Leading
Over PF Leading
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
Long Blink Pattern
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
11
12
9
10
5
6
3
4
1
2
15
16
Short Blink Pattern
1
2
5
6
3
4
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Reset a Trip
Troubleshooting
Chapter 11
Control
Analog
Code
Test
PTC
DeviceLogix
Operator Station
Remote Trip
Blocked Start
Hardware Fault
Configuration
Option Match
Feedback Timeout
Expansion Bus
Number Of Starts
Operating Hours
Nonvolatile Memory
Test Mode
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
Long Blink Pattern
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
10
7
8
11
12
5
6
3
4
1
2
14
15
Short Blink Pattern
1
4
5
2
3
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
ATTENTION:
Resetting a trip does not correct the cause for the trip. Take corrective action before you reset the trip.
Reset the E200 relay trip condition by taking one of the following actions:
• Actuate the Blue Trip/Reset button on the E200 relay Communication Module
• Actuate the Reset button on the E200 relay Operator Station
• Set the Trip Reset bit in the Output Assembly of the E200 relay via the
Connected Components Workbench software
• Actuate a reset signal to one of the assigned digital inputs
• Set Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173) to “Automatic” to allow the unit to automatically reset after an overload trip
• Set Trip Reset (Parameter 163) to a value of 1, “Trip Reset”
IMPORTANT
An overload trip cannot be reset until the value of Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
(Parameter 1) is below the value set in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
175
Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
Trip/Warn LED
Troubleshooting
Trip Description
Test Trip
Overload
Phase Loss
Ground Fault
Stall
Jam
PTC
Current Imbalance
Nonvolatile Storage
Fault
Hardware Fault
Configuration Fault
Remote Trip
Total Starts Warning
Possible Cause
1. Operation of the Test/Reset
1. Motor overloaded
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Missing supply phase
2. Poor electrical connection
Corrective Action
1. Operate the Test/Reset button to clear
1. Check and correct source of overload (load, mechanical transmission components, motor bearings).
2. Set parameter values to match the motor and application requirements.
1. Check for open line (for example, blown fuse).
2. Check all power terminations from the branch circuit-protecting device down to the motor for proper tightness. Make sure that the overload connection to the contactor is secure.
3. Inspect contactor for proper operation.
4. Single-phase applications require that Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to “single phase”.
3. Contactor operation
4. Improper parameter setting
1. Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
2. Motor winding insulation is decayed
3. Foreign Object short
4. External ground fault sensor (core balance current transformer) has improper connection
1. Motor has not reached full speed by the end of the Stall Enabld Time (Parameter
249)
1. Check power conductors and motor windings for low resistance to ground.
2. Check motor winding insulation for low resistance to ground.
3. Check for foreign objects.
4. Check cable connections.
1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive load, or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Starts Counter (Parameter 29) is equal to or greater than the value set in Total Starts
(Parameter 207)
2. Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA Setting
(Parameter 171) is set correctly.
1. Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam level
3. Illegal configuration value
1. Contact closure of remote sensor (for example, vibration switch).
1. Check for the source of the jam (i.e., excessive load or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Motor stator windings overheated
4. Contactor or circuit breaker operation
1. Firmware Downgrade corrupted:
Nonvolatile memory
2. Internal product failure
2. Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA Setting
(Parameter 171) is set correctly.
1. Check for source of motor overtemperature (for example, overload, obstructed cooling, high ambient temperature, excessive starts/hour).
2. Thermistor leads short-circuited or broken 2. Inspect thermistor leads for short-circuit or open
1. Imbalance in incoming power 1. Check power system (for example, blown fuse).
2. Motor winding imbalance
3. Motor idling
2. Repair motor, or if acceptable, raise value of Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261), CI Trip Level
3. Raise value of Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) to an acceptable level.
4. Inspect contactor and circuit breaker for proper operation.
1.Execute the Clear Command to the operating Statistics, History Logs, and % TCU
1. Firmware of sensing module is not compatible with control module firmware
2. Hardware configuration failure
2. Consult the factory.
1. Verify firmware revisions of control module and sensing module
2. Update firmware of control module to v2.0 or higher
3. Consult the factory.
4. Verify that the Sensing, Control, and Communication Module are connected properly.
5. Verify that connection pins between sensing module and control module are not bent.
1. Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to "Single Phase" and current is being sensed in phase L3 during motor operation.
2. Operating Mode "Overload (Network)" does not have an assigned Trip Relay
1. For three-phase applications, Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) should be set to “Three-Phase”; for singlephase applications, verify that current is flowing through L1 and L2 only.
2. Verify that one of the Output Assignments (Parameters 202…204) is configured as a "Trip Relay"
3. Review Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) to identify which configuration parameter is illegal and the reason why.
1. Take corrective action to address the issue that caused the sensor to actuate.
2. Check sensor for proper operation.
3. Check wiring.
1. Set Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear Operating Statistics" to reset Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
176
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Troubleshooting
Chapter 11
Trip Description
Total Operating
Hours Warning
Blocked Start
Possible Cause
1. Operating Time (Parameter 28) is equal to or greater than the value set in Total
Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
1. The number of starts count within the past hour period equals the value set in the
Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205)
2. The time expired since the most recent start is less than the value set in the Starts
Interval (Parameter 206)
Corrective Action
1. Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear Operating Statistics" to reset Operating Time (Parameter 28)
1. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to allow more starts/hour.
2. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to shorten the interval between starts.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
177
Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
Notes:
178
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Appendix
A
Wiring Diagrams
E200 Wiring Configurations
The following pages illustrate various wiring configurations for the E200 Electronic
Overload Relay
Figure 79 - Delta Configuration with Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
L1
T1
S1
S2
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
Delta Load
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
179
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Figure 80 - Wye Configuration with Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L1
T2
L3
T3
T1
L2
S1
S2
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
180
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 81 - Grounded B Phase Configuration With Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Grounded B Phase
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
L1
T1
S1
S2
Delta Load
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
181
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 82 - Delta Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Delta-to-Delta)
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
L1
T1
Delta to Delta Potential
Transformer
Delta Load
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
182
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 83 - Wye Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Delta-to-Delta)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
Delta to Delta Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
183
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 84 - Delta Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Wye-to-Wye)
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L3
T3
S1
L2
T2
S2
L1
T1
Delta Load
Wye to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
184
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 85 - Wye Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Wye-to-Wye)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
S1
S2
L3
T3
L1
T1
L2
T2
Wye to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
185
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Delta Load
Figure 86 - Delta Configuration with Wye-to-Delta Potential Transformers
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L3
T3
S1
L2
T2
S2
L1
T1
Wye to Delta Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
186
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 87 - Wye Configuration with Wye-to-Delta Potential Transformers
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
L1
T1
L2
10 M
10 M
10 M
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wye to Delta Potential
Transformer
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
187
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Delta Load
Figure 88 - Delta Configuration with Delta-to-Wye Potential Transformers
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
L1
T1
Delta to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
188
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 89 - Wye Configuration with Delta-to-Wye Potential Transformers
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
Delta to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
189
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Notes:
190
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Symbols
% TCU
% TCU, clear
A
add-on modules
expansion bus power supply
expansion I/O
operator station
See modes
advisory LEDs
power
trip/warn
all, clear
analog I/O expansion modules
analog module 1
input channels
output channel
analog input channels
analog module 1
analog monitor
analog output channel
analog-based protection
analog module 1
apparent power
L1
L2
L3
total
apparent power protection
applications
average current
average L-L voltage
average L-N voltage
average percent FLA
C
clear all
clear command
% TCU
all
history logs
kVAh
kVARh
kWh
max. kVA demand
max. kVAR demand
max. kW
operating statistics
compatibility
firmware
commands
clear
configuration preset
trip reset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Index
communication module
description
communication options
overview
configuration
system
configuration preset
factory defaults
configuration states
output relay
output relay communication fault mode
output relay communication idle mode
output relay protection fault mode
Connected Components Workbench Software
configuration
device commissioning
DeviceLogix interface
establish connection
contactor feedback protection
control module
description
control module ID
control trip status
control warning status
control-based protection
contactor feedback
devicelogix
expansion bus fault
hardware fault
nonvolatile storage fault
operator station trip
preventive maintenance
remote trip
start inhibit
test mode trip
test trip
thermistor
current
average
L1
L2
L3
current imbalance
current imbalance protection
current monitor
average current
average percent FLA
current imbalance
ground fault current
L1 current
L1 percent FLA
L2 current
L2 percent FLA
L3 current
L3 percent FLA
current trip status
current warning status
191
Index
192 current-based protection
current imbalance
ground fault current
jam
line loss
line overcurrent
line undercurrent
overload
phase loss
stall
underload
custom
D
day
device configuration policy
device modes
device monitor
control module ID
control trip status
control warning status
current trip status
current warning status
day
device status 0
device status 1
expansion digital module ID
firmware revision number
hour
input status 0
input status 1
invalid configuration cause
invalid configuration parameter
minute
mismatch status
month
operating time
operator station ID
operator station status
output status
percent thermal capacity utilized
power trip status
power warning status
second
sensing module ID
starts available
starts counter
time to reset
time to start
time to trip
voltage trip status
voltage warning status
year
device reset policy
device status 0
device status 1
DeviceLogix
output relay overrides
programming
DeviceLogix interface
protection function
devicelogix protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
diagnostic information
overview
diagnostic station
display timeout
navigation keys
parameter display
user-defined screens
display sequence
programmable
stopping
display timeout
E
EDS file
download
installation
EDS file installation
download
electronic data sheet
download
installation
emergency start
energy monitor
kVA demand
kVAh 10^0
kVAh 10^-3
kVAh 10^3
kVAh 10^6
kVAh 10^9
kVAR demand
kVARh consumed 10^0
kVARh consumed 10^-3
kVARh consumed 10^3
kVARh consumed 10^6
kVARh consumed 10^9
kVARh generated 10^0
kVARh generated 10^-3
kVARh generated 10^3
kVARh generated 10^6
kVARh generated 10^9
kVARh net 10^0
kVARh net 10^-3
kVARh net 10^3
kVARh net 10^6
kVARh net 10^9
kW demand
kWh 10^0
kWh 10^-3
kWh 10^3
kWh 10^6
kWh 10^9
max. kVA demand
max. kVAR demand
max. kW demand
expansion bus
fault
expansion bus fault
expansion digital module ID
expansion module
digital I/O
expansion modules
analog I/O
Index
F
factory defaults
firmware
updating
firmware compatibility
firmware revision number
firmware update policy
firmware updates
compatibility
frequency
frequency protection
FRN
See
firmware revision number
G
ground fault current
ground fault current protection
ground fault current-based protection
H
hardware fault
history logs, clear
hour
I
I/O assignments
input Pt00
input Pt01
input Pt02
input Pt03
input Pt04
input Pt05
output Pt00
output Pt01
output Pt02
input Pt00 assignment
input Pt01 assignment
input Pt02 assignment
input Pt03 assignment
input Pt04 assignment
input Pt05 assignment
input status 0
input status 1
introduction to operating modes
invalid configuration cause
invalid configuration parameter
J
jam protection
K
kVA demand
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
L
L1 apparent power
L1 current
L1 percent FLA
L1 power factor
L1 reactive power
L1 real power
L1-L2 voltage
trip snapshot
L1-N voltage
L2 apparent power
L2 current
L2 percent FLA
L2 power factor
L2 reactive power
L2 real power
L2-L3 voltage
trip snapshot
L2-N voltage
L3 apparent power
L3 current
L3 percent FLA
L3 power factor
L3 reactive power
kVAh 10^0
kVAh 10^-3
kVAh 10^3
kVAh 10^6
kVAh 10^9
kVAh, clear
kVAR demand
kVARh consumed 10^0
kVARh consumed 10^-3
kVARh consumed 10^3
kVARh consumed 10^6
kVARh consumed 10^9
kVARh generated 10^0
kVARh generated 10^-3
kVARh generated 10^3
kVARh generated 10^6
kVARh generated 10^9
kVARh net 10^0
kVARh net 10^-3
kVARh net 10^3
kVARh net 10^6
kVARh net 10^9
KVARh, clear
kW demand
kWh 10^0
kWh 10^-3
kWh 10^3
kWh 10^6
kWh 10^9
kWh, clear
193
Index
194
L3 real power
L3-L1 voltage
trip snapshot
L3-N voltage
language
LEDs
advisory
power
trip/warn
troubleshooting
line loss protection
line overcurrent protection
line undercurrent protection
linear list navigation
M
max. kVA demand
max. kVA demand, clear
max. kVAR demand
max. kVAR demand, clear
max. kW demand
max. kW, clear
metering and diagnostics
analog monitor
current monitor
device monitor
energy monitor
power monitor
trip snapshot
trip/warning history
voltage monitor
minute
mismatch status
modes
administration
invalid configuration
ready
run
test
modular design
overview
module description
communication
control
sensing
monitor operating mode
custom
month
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
N
non-reversing starter operating modes
custom
local I/O, three-wire control
local I/O, three-wire control with feedback
local I/O, two-wire control
local I/O, two-wire control with feedback
network
network and local I/O with feedback, threewire control
network and local I/O, three-wire control
network and local I/O, two-wire control
network and local I/O, two-wire control with feedback
network and operator station
network and operator station with feedback
network with feedback
operator station
operator station with feedback
nonvolatile storage fault
O
Operating Modes
operating modes
introduction
non-reversing starter
overload
reversing starter
two-speed starter
operating statistics, clear
operating time
operation
system
operator station ID
operator station status
operator station trip
option match
action
analog I/O expansion module 1 type
analog I/O expansion module 3 type
analog I/O expansion module 4 type
communication module type
control module type
digital I/O expansion module 1 type
digital I/O expansion module 3 type
digital I/O expansion module 4 type
enable option match protection trip
enable option match protection warning
operator station type
sensing module type
output Pt00 assignment
output Pt01 assignment
output Pt02 assignment
output relay configuration states
communication fault mode
communication idle mode
protection fault mode
output relay overrides
output status
Overload (Custom)
overload operating modes
custom
local I/O
network
operator station
overload (Local I/O)
overload protection
override
output relay
overview
communication options
diagnostic information
modular design
simplified wiring
overvoltage protection
P
parameter
display
editing
group navigation
linear list navigation
system info
percent FLA
average
L1
L2
L3
percent thermal capacity utilized
phase loss protection
phase rotation
phase rotation protection
policy
device configuration
device reset
firmware update
security
security configuration
power factor
L1
L2
L3
total
,
power factor protection
power LED
troubleshooting
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
power monitor
L1 apparent power
L1 power factor
L1 reactive power
L1 real power
L2 apparent power
L2 power factor
L2 reactive power
L2 real power
L3 apparent power
L3 power factor
L3 reactive power
L3 real power
power scale
total apparent power
total power factor
total reactive power
total real power
power scale
power trip status
power warning status
power-based protection
apparent power
power factor
reactive power
real power
preventive maintenance
programming
DeviceLogix
protection
current based
ground fault current based
power based
thermal based
voltage based
protection features
protective trip and warning functions
analog based
control
current-based
power
voltage based
R
reactive power
L1
L2
L3
total
reactive power protection
real power
apparent
L1
L2
L3
total
real power protection
remote trip
reset trip
Index
195
Index
196 reversing starter operating modes
custom
local I/O, three-wire control
local I/O, two-wire control
local I/O, two-wire control with feedback
network
network and operator station
network and operator station, three-wire control
network and operator station, two-wire control
network with feedback
operator station
operator station with feedback
See modes
S
screens
trip and warning
second
security configuration policy
security policy
sensing module
description
sensing module ID
simplified wiring
overview
stall protection
start inhibit protection
starts available
starts counter
system configuration
system operation
T
test mode trip
See modes
test trip
thermal-based protection
thermistor protection
time to reset
time to start
time to trip
total apaprent power
total apparent power
total power factor
total reactive power
total real power
,
trip
reset
trip and warning screens
trip history
trip reset
trip snapshot
L1-L2 voltage
L2-L3 voltage
L3-L1 voltage
total apparent power
total power factor
total reactive power
total real power
trip/warn LED
troubleshooting
troubleshooting procedure
trip/warning history
trip history
warning history
troubleshooting
advisory LEDs
power LED
trip reset
trip/warn LED
trip/warn LED procedure
two-speed starter operating modes
custom
local I/O, three-wire control
local I/O, two-wire control
local I/O, two-wire with feedback
network
network and local I/O, three-wire control
network and local I/O, two-wire control
network and operator station
network with feedback
operator station
operator station with feedback
U
underload protection
undervoltage protection
updating firmware
user-defined screens
V
voltage
average L-L
average L-N
imbalance
L1-L2
L1-N
L2-L3
L2-N
L3-L1
L3-N
voltage- and power-based protection
voltage imbalabce protection
voltage imbalance
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
voltage monitor
average L-L voltage
average L-N voltage
frequency
L1-L2 voltage
L1-N voltage
L2-L3 voltage
L2-N voltage
L3-L1 voltage
L3-N voltage
phase rotation
voltage imbalance
voltage trip status
voltage warning status
voltage-based protection
frequency
overvoltage
phase rotation
undervoltage
voltage imbalance
W
warning history
wiring diagrams
year
Y
Index
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
197
Index
198
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
.
Rockwell Automation Support
Use the following resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers
Direct Dial Codes
Literature Library
Product Compatibility and Download
Center (PCDC)
Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User
Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
Locate the phone number for your country.
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to route your call directly to a technical support engineer.
Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and
Technical Data.
Get help determining how products interact, check features and capabilities, and find associated firmware.
https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
How Are We Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf
.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page
.
Allen-Bradley, Connected Components Workbench, DeviceLogix, E200, E300, Rockwell Automation, and Rockwell Software are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Excel, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Publication 193-UM017A-EN-P - April 2019
Copyright © 2019 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Advertisement
